Home

SMC Networks SMC8724M User's Manual

Contents

1. STA Port Configuration 1 F Enabled Forwarding 128 o Auto Z Enabled F Enabled 2 F Enabled Discarding 128 o Auto ZI Enabled I Enabled 3 MeEnabled Discarding 128 o Auto Z F Enabled F Enabled 4 F Enabled Discarding he 0 Auto y F Enabled I Enabled 5 F Enabled Discarding 128 o Auto Z enabled I Enabled 6 Enabled Discarding ize o Auto Enabled F Enabled 7 F Enabled Discarding 128 o Auto Z F Enabled Enabled e enabled Discarding 128 o Ato z M Enabled I Enabled P Figure 3 68 STA Port Configuration CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 7 4 174 Console config if no spanning tree spanning disabled 4 224 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 4 226 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 4 225 Console config if spanning tree link type auto 4 228 Console config if no spanning tree edge port 4 226 Console config if Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 3 156 MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MST Instance 0 that connects all bridges and L
2. Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts To alert system administrators of problems the switch can use SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol to send email messages when triggered by logging events of a specified level The messages are sent to specified SMTP servers on the network and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients 3 37 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 38 Command Attributes Admin Status Enables disables the SMTP function Default Enabled Email Source Address Sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Severity Sets the syslog severity threshold level see Table 3 3 used to trigger alert messages All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Default Level 7 SMTP Server List Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP servers The switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the first fails Use the New SMTP Server text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list Email Destination Address List Specifies the email recipients of alert messages You can specify up to five recipients Use the New Email Destination Address text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list BASIC
3. 00000000 cee 3 96 Configuring a MAC ACL Mask 00 000005 3 98 Binding a Port to an Access Control List o o o o 3 100 Port Contiguration iii tata oo Pata eee a ee 3 102 Displaying Connection Status ooooooccccocoommmm 3 102 Configuring Interface Connections oooooocccocooomo 3 105 Creating Trunk Groups 6 66 3 107 Statically Configuring a Trunk o ooooooommm 3 109 Enabling LACP on Selected Ports oooooo o oo o 3 111 Configuring LACP Parameters ooooooooococooo 3 113 Displaying LACP Port Counters ooooooccoooomo 3 116 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side 3 118 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side 3 121 Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds oooo o ooooo o 3 123 Configuring Port Mirroring 1 0 00 0 00 3 125 CONTENTS Configuring Rate Limits ooooocococooooocccccoo oo 3 126 Showing Port Statistics ooooooooooccccomommm roo 3 127 Address Fable Settings ida deta Tue doe ah eo 3 134 Setting Static Addresses 2 0 0 ec ee eee 3 134 Displaying the Address Table oooommmmo rooo o 3 136 Changing the Aging Time 0 cee ee ee eee 3 137 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 0 000000 ee 3 138 Displaying Global Settings 00 0 eee ee eee 3 140 Configuring Global Settings 0 0 cc eee eee eee 3 144 Displaying Interface Settings 0 eee eee 3
4. COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port Table 4 47 Mirror Port Commands Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4 188 show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4 189 port monitor This command configures a mirror session Use the no form to clear a mirror session Syntax port monitor nterface rx tx both no port monitor nterface interface ethernet unit port source port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 e rx Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets both Mirror both received and transmitted packets Default Setting No mirror session is defined When enabled the default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet destination port 4 188 MIRROR Port COMMANDS Command Usage e You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port
5. Related Commands permit deny 4 118 ip access group 4 128 access list ip mask precedence This command accesses the IP Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified IP ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Example Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl 4 123 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE mask Related Commands mask IP ACL 4 124 ip access group 4 128 IP ACL This command defines a mask for IP ACLs This mask defines the fields to 4 124 check in the IP header Use the no form to remove a mask Syntax no mask protocol any host sowrce bitmask any host destination bitmask precedence tos dscp source port port bitmas
6. SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server when set to SNTP Client mode Range 16 16284 seconds Default 16 SNTP Server Sets the IP address for up to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Select SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and click Apply SNTP Configuration SNTP Client F Enabled SNTP Polling Interval 16 16384 16 SNTP Server 101 019 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Figure 3 21 SNTP Configuration CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client and then displays the current time and settings Console config ksntp client 4 71 Console config sntp poll 16 4 72 Console config itsntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 24 70 Console config sntp client 4 70 Console config exit Console show sntp Current time Jan 2 01 45 28 2001 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Current server 137 82 140 80 Console Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must
7. name Name of the host Range 1 64 characters e Removes all entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example clears all static entries from the DNS table Console config clear host Console config 4 165 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip domain name This command defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names i e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove the current domain name Syntax ip domain name name no ip domain name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip domain name sample com Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain list 4 167 ip name server 4 168 ip domain lookup 4 169 4 166 DNS CoMMANDS ip domain list This command defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names i e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove a name from this list Syntax no ip domain list name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot
8. Event Logging Commands 4 56 Table 4 17 Event Logging Commands Command Function Mode Page logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4 57 logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch GC 4 58 memory based on severity logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will GC 4 59 receive logging messages SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Table 4 17 Event Logging Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of GC 4 60 syslog messages logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote GC 4 61 server based on severity clear log Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4 62 show logging Displays the state of logging PE 4 62 show log Displays log messages PE 4 64 logging on This command controls logging of error messages sending debug or error messages to switch memory The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored Example Console config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 4 58 clear log 4 62 4 57 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE logging history This comman
9. Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 BASIC CONFIGURATION Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts Silent Time Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded Range 0 65535 Default 0 Data Bits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Default 8 bits Parity Defines the generation of a parity bit Communication protocols provided by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting Specify Even Odd or None Default None Speed Sets the terminal line s baud rate for transmit to terminal and receive from terminal Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Range 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 baud Auto Default Auto S
10. Figure 3 25 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication and link up link down traps Console config Hsnmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman version 2c udp port 162 4 151 Console config Hsnmp server enable traps authentication 4 153 Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 3 50 To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch follow these steps 1 If you want to change the default engine ID do so before configuring other SNMP parameters Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree 3 Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model 1 e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level 1 e authentication and privacy 4 Assign SNMP users to groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Setting an Engine ID An SNMPvy3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engineID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users A new engine ID can be specified
11. Syntax show map access list ip i erface interface ethernet wnit port e unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 4 130 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map access list ip Access list to COS of Eth 1 24 Access list ALS1 cos 0 Console Related Commands map access list ip 4 129 match access list ip This command changes the IEEE 802 1p priority IP Precedence or DSCP Priority of a frame matching the defined ACL rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking Use the no form to remove the ACL marker Syntax match access list ip ac _name set priority priority set tos tos_value set dscp dscp_value no match access list ip ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority tos_value IP Precedence value Range 0 7 e dscp_value Differentiated Services Code Point value Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities based on an ACL rule 4 131 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Traffic priorities may be included in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag This tag is also incorporated as part of the overall IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag To specify this
12. Xe bridge and is therefore not Z selected as the designated ort R a P A D X Y Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Information only These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Admin status Shows if this interface is enabled External path cost The path cost for the IST This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Internal path cost The path cost for the MST See the proceeding item Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same the port with the highest priority 1 e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Fast forwarding This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with
13. ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter This command statically configures a multicast router port Use the no form to remove the configuration Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan 2 an d mrouter interface e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your router you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups 4 285 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 Console config show ip igmp snooping mrouter This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan v an id vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include S
14. MAC MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type REC 1060 3 88 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Web Click Security ACL Configuration Enter an ACL name in the Name field select the list type 1P Standard IP Extended or MAC and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list ACL Configuration Type Name Remove Edit Name david Type Standerd Add Figure 3 41 Selecting ACL Type CLI This example creates a standard IP ACL named bill Console config access list ip standard david 4 117 Console config std acl Configuring a Standard IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules e Address Type Specifies the source IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any IP Address Source IP address Subnet Mask A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned
15. Server Port Number 1 65535 fier Secret Text String ad Number of Server Transmits 1 30 5 Timeout for a reply 1 565535 ho sec TACACS Settings Serer IP Address fioni2i3 Server Port Number 1 65535 49 Secret Text String Figure 3 31 Authentication Server Settings CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Console config authentication login radius 4 92 Console config radius server port 181 4 96 Console config radius server key green 4 96 Console config radius server retransmit 5 4 97 Console config radius server timeout 10 4 97 Console show radius server 4 98 Remote RADIUS server configuration Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Console config authentication login tacacs 4 92 Console config tacacs server host 10 20 30 40 4 99 Console config tacacs server port 200 4 100 Console config tacacs server key green 4 100 Console show tacacs server 4 101 Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 10 20 30 40 Communication key with tacacs server Server port number 200 Console config USER AUTHENTICATION Configuring HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Command
16. authentication login radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Example Console config authentication login radius Console config Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 4 34 authentication enable This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the enable command see page 4 26 Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication enable local radius tacacs no authentication enable e local Use local password only e radius Use RADIUS server password only tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privile
17. e You can create multiple mirror sessions but all sessions must share the same destination port However you should avoid sending too much traffic to the destination port from multiple source ports Example The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 both Console config if show port monitor This command displays mirror information Syntax show port monitor nterface interface ethernet unit port source port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 Default Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port destination port and mirror mode i e RX TX RX TX 4 189 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination port listen port Eth1 1 Source port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX TX Console Rate Limit Commands 4 190 This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit
18. show access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs 4 127 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list ip mask precedence IP ingress mask ACL mask host any mask 255 255 255 0 any Console Related Commands mask IP ACL 4 124 ip access group 4 128 This command binds a port to an IP ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip access group ac _name in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets out Indicates that this list applies to egress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Example Console config int eth 1 25 Console config if ip access group standard david in Console config if Related Commands show ip access list 4 122 show ip access group This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access group Interface etherne
19. show logging flash ram sendmail trap e flash Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset e sendmail Displays settings for the SMTP event handler page 4 69 e trap Displays settings for the trap function 4 62 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors 1 e default level 3 0 and the message level for RAM is debugging 1 e default level 7 0 Console show logging flash Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level errors Console show logging ram Syslog logging Enabled History logging in RAM level debugging Console Table 4 19 show logging flash ram display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command History logging in The message level s reported based on the logging history FLASH command History logging in The message level s reported based on the logging history RAM command The following example displays settings for the trap function Console show logging trap Syslog logging Enable REMOTELOG status disable REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REM
20. switchport native vlan This command configures the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport native vlan vian id no switchport native vlan vlan id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config if 4 243 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport allowed vlan This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport allowed vlan add v an ist tagged untagged remove v an list no switchport allowed vlan e add v an list List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove v an list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vlan list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN ident
21. Copper Preferred Auto SFP Forced SFP Preferred Auto Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member Creation Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP 3 Port nformation only 4 Trunk Information only 3 102 PORT CONFIGURATION Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information Port Name Type Admin Status Oper Status Speed Duplex Status Flow Control Status Autonegotiation Media Type Trunk Member Enabled Up 100full None Enabled None Down 1000full None Enabled None Down 1000full None Enabled None Down 1000full None Enabled None Down 1000full None Enabled None Down 1000full None Enabled None Down 1000futl None Enabled None Down 1000fult None Enabled None Down 1000full None Enabled None Dawn 1000futt None Enabled None Down 1000full None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled Down 1000full None Enabled None zj Figure 3 49 Port Status Information Field Attributes CLI Basic information Port type Indicates the port type 1000BASE T or SFP MAC address The physical layer address for this port To access this item on the web see Setting the Switch s IP Address on page 3 18 Configuration Name Interface label Port admin Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled i e up or down Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Capabilities Specifies
22. Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts page 4 107 Mode Dotlx port control mode page 4 106 Authorized Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 802 1X Port Details Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items reauth enabled Periodic re authentication page 4 108 reauth period Time after which a connected client must be re authenticated page 4 109 quiet period Time a port waits after Max Request Count is exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client page 4 109 tx period Time a port waits during authentication session before re transmitting EAP packet page 4 110 supplicant timeout Supplicant timeout setver timeout Server timeout reauth max Maximum number of reauthentication attempts max req Maximum number of times a port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session page 4 106 Status Authorization status authorized or not Operation Mode Shows if single or multiple hosts clients can connect to an 802 1X authorized port Max Count The maximum number of hosts allowed to access this port page 4 107 4 111 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Port control Shows the dotlx mode on a port as auto force authorized or force unauthorized page 4 106 Supplicant MAC address of authorized client
23. Username The user name of the client 4 54 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Table 4 16 show ssh display description Continued Field Description Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server Options for SSHv1 5 include DES 3DES Options for SSHv2 0 can include different algorithms for the client to server ctos and server to client stoc aes128 cbc hmac shal aes192 cbc hmac shal aes256 cbc hmac shal 3des cbc hmac shal blowfish cbc hmac shal aes128 cbc hmac md5 aes192 cbc hmac md5 aes256 cbc hmac md5 3des cbc hmac md5 blowfish cbc hmac md5 Terminology DES Data Encryption Standard 56 bit key 3DES Triple DES Uses three iterations of DES 112 bit key aes Advanced Encryption Standard 160 or 224 bit key blowfish Blowfish 32 448 bit key cbc cypher block chaining shal Secure Hash Algorithm 1 160 bit hashes md5 Message Digest algorithm number 5 128 bit hashes show public key This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host Syntax show public key user username host username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters Default Setting Shows all public keys 4 55 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Ifno parameters are entered all keys are displayed If the user keyword is entered but no user name is sp
24. admin and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command 41 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verification Username admin Password CLI session with the SMC8748M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10 1 0 1 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To access the switch through a Telnet session you must first set the IP address for the switch and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a diffe
25. copy tftp https certificate 4 84 ip http secure port This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip http secure port port_number no ip http secure port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS SSL Range 1 65535 4 42 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port If you change the HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL in this format https device port_number Example Console config ip http secure port 1000 Console config Related Commands ip http secure server 4 41 Telnet Server Commands Table 4 14 Telnet Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or GC 4 43 configured from Telnet ip telnet server port Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet GC 4 44 interface ip telnet server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip telnet server 4 43 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip telnet server C
26. duplicate or mirror the traffic on the source port Range 1 8 Target Port The port that will duplicate or mirror the traffic on the source port Range 1 24 48 3 125 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port Mirror Port Configuration Specify the source port the traffic type to be mirrored and the monitor port then click Add Mirror Port Configuration Mirror Sessions New none Source Unit 1 y Source Pon 1 lt Add Type T Tenon El Target Unit Target Port 1 Figure 3 58 Configuring a Mirror Port CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port Note that default mirroring under the CLI is for both received and transmitted packets Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 10 4 174 Console config if Hport monitor ethernet 1 13 4 188 Console config 1f Configuring Rate Limits This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the switch Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be moni
27. Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if 4 180 INTEREACE COMMANDS switchport broadcast packet rate This command configures broadcast storm control Use the no form to disable broadcast storm control Syntax switchport broadcast packet rate rate no switchport broadcast rate Threshold level as a rate i e packets per second Range 500 262143 Default Setting Enabled for all ports Packet rate limit 500 packets per second Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold packets above that threshold are dropped e This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected interface However the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the switch Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 Console config if 4 181 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters nterface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Statistics are only initialized fo
28. Console show vlan 4 246 VLAN ID t Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 s Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 s Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 s Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 s Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Eth1 25 S Eth1 26 S Eth1 27 S Eth1 28 S Eth1 29 S Eth1 30 S Eth1 31 S Eth1 32 s Eth1 33 S Eth1 34 S Eth1 35 S Eth1 36 S Eth1 37 s Eth1 38 S Eth1 39 S Eth1 40 S Eth1 41 S Eth1 42 s Eth1 43 S Eth1 44 S Eth1 45 S Eth1 46 S Eth1 47 s Eth1 48 S Trunk2 S VLAN ID 2 Type Static Name R amp D Status Active Ports Port Channels Console Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN aware devices Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol Notes 1 You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 3 175 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch and can onl
29. Disabled LACP Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Media type None Current status Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Console show interfaces status vlan 1 00 00 AB CD 00 00 100full 1000full show interfaces counters This command displays interface statistics Syntax show interfaces counters nterface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec INTEREACE COMMANDS Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Showing Port Statistics on page 3 127 Example Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 7 Iftable stats Octets input 30658 Octets output 196550 Unicast input 6 Unicast output 5 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 3064 Broadcast input 262 Broadcast output 1 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissi
30. Generating the Host Key Pair A host public private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch After generating this key pair you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client s public key to the switch as described in the proceeding section Command Usage Field Attributes Public Key of Host Key The public key for the host RSA Version 1 The first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 65537 and the last string is the encoded modulus DSA Version 2 The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS The last string is the encoded modulus Host Key Type The key type used to generate the host key pair i e public and private keys Range RSA Version 1 DSA Version 2 Both Default Both The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Saves the host key from RAM e volatile memory to flash memory Otherwise the host key pair is stored to RAM by default Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host key pair e Generate This button is used to generate
31. Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use IEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration Automatic VLAN Registration GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which each end station should be assigned If an end station or its network adapter supports the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN protocol it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join When this switch receives these messages it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and then forward the message to all other ports When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP it will also place the receiving port in the specifi
32. access to the switch If you assign an IP address to any other VLAN the new IP address overrides the original IP address and this becomes the new management VLAN Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config 1f Related Commands ip dhcp restart 4 289 ip dhcp restart This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if available Ifthe BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain 4 289 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example In the following example the device is reassigned the same addtess Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if exit Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode Dhcp Console Related Commands ip address 4 288 ip default gateway 4 290 This command establishes a static route between this switch and
33. e 4 27 e 4 28 e 4 29 e 4 30 e 4 31 e 4 32 e 4 33 e 4 34 e 4 35 e 4 36 e 4 37 e 4 38 e 4 39 e 4 40 e 4 41 e 4 42 e 4 43 e 4 44 e 4 45 e 4 46 e 4 47 e 4 48 e 4 49 e 4 50 e 4 51 e 4 52 e 4 53 Event Logging Commands 000000000008 4 56 Lopoing Levels iis acai tddi T bate 4 58 show logging flash ram display description 4 63 show logging trap display description 4 64 SMTP Alert Commands 0 000 c eee eee 4 65 Time Commands 9 s eve hes e dd bem 4 70 System Status Commands 0 000 0000 4 76 Frame Size Commands 00 0 cece eee ee 4 82 Flash File Commands 0 00 00 cece eee eee 4 84 File Directory Information 0000000000 4 89 Authentication Commands 0 0008 4 91 Authentication Sequence ussas eee ee eee 4 91 RADIUS Client Commands 000 4 94 TACACS Client Commands 000 4 99 Port Security Commands 0 000000 4 102 802 1X Port Authentication Commands 4 104 Access Control List Commands 4 116 TP AGL Comibiand de e ocio ances oe baleen os oo 4 116 Egress Queue Priority Mapping oooooooo 4 130 MAC ACL Commands 0002s eee 4 133 Egress Queue Priority Mapping oooooooo o 4 142 AGL Informations ose SM ue A 4 144 SNMP Commands nasua 0 00 cece 4 146 show snmp engine id display description 4 155
34. ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config ip igmp snooping version 4 278 This command configures the IGMP snooping version Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 no ip igmp snooping version e 1 IGMP Version 1 e 2 IGMP Version 2 Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 including ip igmp query max response time and ip igmp query timeout Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS show ip igmp snooping This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 202 for a description of the displayed items Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service status Enabled Querier status Disabled Query count 2 Query interval 125 sec Query max response time 10 sec Router port expire time 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version
35. none volatile active Group Name public v2c defaultview none none volatile active Group Name private v1 defaultview defaultview none volatile active Group Name private Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active console Table 4 42 show snmp group display description Field Description groupname Name of an SNMP group security model The SNMP version readview The associated read view SNMP COMMANDS Table 4 42 show snmp group display description Field Description writeview The associated write view notifyview The associated notify view storage type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry snmp setver user This command adds a user to an SNMP group restricting the user to a specific SNMP Read and a Write View Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP group Syntax snmp server user sername groupname v1 v2c v3 encrypted auth md5 sha autb password priv des56 priv password no snmp server user username username Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters groupname Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 encrypted Accepts the password as encrypted input auth Uses SNMPv3 with aut
36. 1 5 T10 1 0 55 Alias 1 rd6 Console Displaying the DNS Cache You can display entries in the DNS cache that have been learned via the designated name servers Field Attributes No The entry number for each resource record Flag The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable e Type This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or ptimary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry e IP The IP address associated with this record e TTL The time to live reported by the name server Domain The domain name associated with this record 3 215 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Select DNS Cache No Flag Type IP TTL Domain Oo f4 CNAME 207 46 134 222 51 hwww microsoft akadns net 1 4 CNAME 207 46 134 190 51 Iwww microsoft akadns net 2 4 CNAME 207 46 134 155 51 www microsoft akadns net 3 f CNAME 207 46 249 222 51 Awww microsoft akadns net 4 4 CNAME 207 46 249 27 51 www microsoft akadns net 5 f ALIAS POINTER TO 4 51 www microsoft com 6 4 CNAME 207 46 68 27 71964 msn com tw 7 f ALIAS POINTER TO 6 71964 www msn com tw a 4 CNAME 65 54 131 192 605 passportimages com 9 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 8 605 www passportimages com 10 4 CNAME 165 193 72 190 87 global msads net hal Figure 3 100 DNS C
37. 152 3 155 4 226 global settings configuring 3 144 4 212 4 218 global settings displaying 3 140 4 233 Index 3 INDEX interface settings 3 149 3 160 3 162 4 225 4 232 4 233 link type 3 152 3 155 4 228 path cost 3 141 3 151 4 225 path cost method 3 146 4 217 port priority 3 151 4 226 protocol migration 3 155 4 232 transmission limit 3 147 4 218 standards IEEE A 3 startup files creating 3 27 4 84 displaying 3 23 4 76 setting 3 23 4 90 static addresses setting 3 134 4 206 statistics port 3 127 4 184 STP 3 144 4 213 STP Also see STA system clock setting 3 42 4 70 system software downloading from server 3 23 4 84 T TACACS logon authentication 3 61 4 98 time setting 3 42 4 70 traffic class weights 3 191 4 262 trap manager 2 14 3 48 4 151 troubleshooting B 1 trunk configuration 3 107 4 192 LACP 3 111 4 194 static 3 109 4 194 Index 4 U upgrading software 3 23 4 84 user password 3 59 4 34 4 36 V VLANs 3 164 3 181 4 235 4 248 adding static members 3 173 3 175 4 244 creating 3 171 4 237 description 3 164 displaying basic information 3 168 4 255 displaying port members 3 169 4 246 egress mode 3 179 4 240 interface configuration 3 177 4 241 4 245 private 3 180 4 247 protocol 3 182 4 249 W Web interface access requirements 3 1 configuration buttons 3 4 home page 3 3 menu list 3 4 3 5 panel display 3 4 FOR TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALL
38. 2 Console show mac address table multicast This command shows known multicast addresses Syntax show mac address table multicast vlan v an id user igmp snooping e vlan id VLAN ID 1 to 4093 e user Display only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping Default Setting None 4 279 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 11 IGMP Console IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 4 280 Table 4 71 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 router port expire time Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the GC 4 281 querier for IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping Configures the query count GC 4 281 query count ip igmp snooping Configures the query interval GC 4 282 query interval ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 4 283 query max response time ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeout GC 4 284 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snooping querier This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier Use the no form to disabl
39. 2 000 200 000 Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Enter the priority and path cost for an interface and click Apply MSTP Port Configuration MST Instance ID 0 SonlSTA Sta Priority Admin MST Path Cost 0 240 in steps of 16 1 200000000 0 Auto 1 Forwarding 128 o 2 Discarding 128 3 Discarding 128 4 Discarding 128 5 Discarding 128 6 Discarding fo 0 3 5 a 7 Discarding 128 Figure 3 71 MSTP Port Configuration CLI This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4 Console config interface ethernet 1 4 4 174 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 4 231 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 4 229 3 163 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH VLAN Configuration IEEE 802 1Q VLANs In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides
40. 3 14 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities o o o o 3 16 Setting the Switch s IP Address ooocooocoooccccoo ooo 3 18 Manual Configuration 0 0 cee eee 3 19 Using DHCP BOOTP 0 cece eee ee 3 20 Managing Firmware 1 0 eee eee 3 22 Downloading System Software from a Servet 3 23 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3 25 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server 3 27 Console Port Settings tii ao 3 28 Telnet SEtunos Primicia ice e ee ASE Giese ee us ads Anes 3 31 Configuring Event Logging 0 0 6 eee ee eee 3 33 System Log Configuration 0 0 06 cc ccc 3 33 Remote Log Configuration oooooccccococnmom 3 35 Displaying Log Messages 0 0000s cece eee eee 3 37 Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts 3 37 Renumbering the Stack 0 6 6 cc ccc cece cece eee 3 40 Resetting the System 6 eee cece eee 3 41 Setting the System Clock 00 ccc cee eee eee 3 42 Configuring SNTE o oooooconcccnccccac nr 3 42 Setting the Time Zone 11 0 dsa eee 3 43 Simple Network Management Protocol 0 000 c cease 3 45 Enabling the SNMP Agent 00 eee 3 47 Setting Community Access Strings oooooococcooomooo 3 47 Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 3 48 Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 045 3 50 Setingan Engine ID aia spoke Aud Gat aed 3 51 Configuring SNMPv3 Users
41. 3 212 General Configuration Domain Lookup Status V Enable Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Current New sample com uk sample corn jp lt lt Add Domain Name Remove Name Server List Current New 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 n Name Server A Figure 3 98 DNS General Configuration CLI This example sets a default domain name and a domain list CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE However remember that if a domain list is specified the default domain name is not used Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Defau e config ip domain name sample com e config ip domain list sample com uk e config ip domain list sample com jp e config ip name server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 e config ip domain lookup e config exit e show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled t Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com uk sample com jp Name Server List 192 168 155 10 1 10 55 Console 4 166 4 167 4 168 4 168 4 169 Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries You can manually configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map domain names to IP addresses Command Usage e Static entries may be used for local devices connected directly to the attached network or for commonly used resources located elsewhere on the network e Servers or other network devices may support one or more con
42. 3 23 Setting the Startup Code oooooocccoooooooccco ooo 3 24 Deleting Filesi 5 004 stave sive rar paa do 3 24 Downloading Configuration Settings for Start Up 3 27 Selecting the Startup Configuration Settings 3 27 Configuring the Console Port oooommm o o o 3 30 Configuring the Telnet Interface oooooo 3 32 System Hogs seth oan ih neuen behest 3 34 Remote Logs Visita tai 3 36 Displaying Logs tosis os oe vee eee eee tae es 3 37 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts 3 39 Renumbering the Stack ooooooooomoo m9 3 41 Resetting the System v 0 0 00 00 0 cece ee como 3 41 SNTP Configuration ese sessie esete eri ene ees 3 43 Setting the Time Zone oooooocomccononoomo ess 3 44 Enabling the SNMP Agent ooooocccccccocooo 3 47 Setting Community Community Strings 3 48 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers oooooooo oo o 3 50 Setting the SNMPv3 Engine ID o oo oooomomo o 3 51 Configuring SNMPv3 Users oooocoooomommmo 3 53 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 000000008 3 55 Configuring SNMPv3 Views 0 0000 eee 3 57 Configuring the Logon Password oooooo o 3 60 Authentication Server Settings ooooocoooooo 3 64 HTTPS Settings cool ee esate a as 3 66 SSH Host Key Settings oooooooocooommmmmm roo 3 71 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3
43. 3 89 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 90 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Then click Add Standard ACL Name david Action IP Address Subnet Mask Remove Permit 10 1 1 21 255 255 255 255 Remove Action Permit Address Type IP y IP Address 119292160 Subnet Mask 255 255 240 0 sc Figure 3 42 ACL Configuration Standard IP CLI This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 4 118 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Configuring an Extended IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain either all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any Source Destination IP Address Source or destination IP address ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Source Destination Sub
44. 4 150 snmp sertver location Sets the system location string GC 4 150 samp server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP GC 4 151 notification operation snmp server enable Enables the device to send SNMP traps GC 4 153 traps i e SNMP notifications snmp server Sets the SNMP engine ID GC 4 154 engine id show snmp engine id Shows the SNMP engine ID PE 4 155 snmp setver view Adds an SNMP view GC 4 156 show snmp view Shows the SNMP views PE 4 157 SNMP COMMANDS Table 4 39 SNMP Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page snmp server group Adds an SNMP group mapping users to GC 4 158 views show snmp group Shows the SNMP groups PE 4 159 snmp setver user Adds a user to an SNMP group GC 4 161 show snmp user Shows the SNMP users PE 4 162 snmp server This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients 1 e versions 1 2c 3 Use the no form to disable the server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server Console config 4 147 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show snmp 4 148 This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and wheth
45. 42 Configuration Configures SNTP client settings including 3 42 broadcast mode or a specified list of servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3 43 SNMP 3 45 Configuration Configures community strings and related 3 47 trap functions Agent Status Enables or disables SNMP 3 47 SNMPv3 3 50 Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID 3 51 Users Configures SNMP v3 users 3 52 Groups Configures SNMP v3 groups 3 54 Views Configures SNMP v3 views 3 56 Security 3 58 User Accounts Configures user names passwords and 3 59 access levels Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence 3 60 RADIUS and TACACS HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3 65 SSH 3 67 Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3 72 Host Key Settings Generates the host key pair public and 3 70 private Port Security Configures per port security including 3 74 status response for security breach and maximum allowed MAC addtesses 802 1X Port authentication 3 76 Information Displays global configuration settings 3 78 NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Configuration Configures protocol parameters 3 79 Port Configuration Sets the authentication mode for individual 3 80 ports Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected 3 83 port IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed 3
46. 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 FIGURES SSH Server Settings 06 eee eee eee 3 73 Port Secutity asd 214 Myatt s eA Eni 3 76 802 1X Global Information 00 0000 3 78 802 1X Configuration s sae eee eee eee 3 79 802 1X Port Configuration 0 3 81 802 1X Port Statistics 0 ec eee eee 3 84 IP Ritet Mores ceed eit es at tyes A ancl hahaha 3 86 Selecting ACI Type a Bii els OSes is 3 89 ACL Configuration Standard IP o o oo 3 90 ACL Configuration Extended IP o 3 92 ACL Configuration MAC 0 6 cece eee 3 94 Selecting ACL Mask Types 0 000000 c eee 3 96 ACL Mask Configuration IP oooooooommm o 3 97 Configuring a MAC based ACL oooooocccccoooo 3 99 ACL Pott Binding ocic5 0 4 act Sed eke a nee aes 3 101 Port Status Information 0 e ce eee eee ee 3 103 Port Port Configuration 0 0 0 cece eee 3 107 Static Trunk Configuration 0 6 0 cece eee 3 110 LACP Trunk Configuration 0 0 0 0 00 0 ee eee 3 112 LACP Aggregation Poft ooooooocccooommmo 3 115 LACP Port Counters Information 3 117 LACP Por
47. 64 characters Default Setting None 4 174 INTEREACE COMMANDS Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 24 Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex 1000full Forces 1000 Mbps full duplex operation e 100full Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation e 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation Default Setting e Auto negotiation is enabled by default When auto negotiation is disabled the default speed duplex setting is 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface 4 175 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the
48. 65535 seconds 0 no timeout Default Setting CLI No timeout Telnet 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e Ifuser input is detected within the timeout interval the session is kept open otherwise the session is terminated e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line 4 18 LINE COMMANDS password thresh This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh zhreshold no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections Example To set the password threshold to five attem
49. 8 ports per trunk Enable port mirroring Set broadcast storm control on any port Display system information and statistics Configure any stack unit through the same IP address Required Connections The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch 2 2 CONNECTING TO THE SWITCH Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the switch You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide To connect a terminal to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows Notes Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 Set to any of these baud rates 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Note Set to 9600 baud to view all system initialization messages Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Set flow control to none Set the emulation mode to VT100 With HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Wi
50. 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets any Any MAC source or destination address e host A specific MAC address source Source MAC address destination Destination MAC address range with bitmask 4 135 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE address bitmask Bitmask for MAC address in hexidecimal format vid VLAN ID Range 1 4095 vid bitmask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4095 protocol A specific Ethernet protocol number Range 600 fff hex protocol bitmask 4 Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex Default Setting None Command Mode MAC ACL Command Usage e New rules are added to the end of the list The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include the following 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Example This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl Related Commands a
51. A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Example The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree Console config spanning tree mode rstp Console config spanning tree forward time This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 214 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config sp
52. Activity Figure 3 56 LACP Port Neighbors Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the remote side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 neighbors 4 201 Port channel 1 neighbors Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 01 Partner Admin Port Number 1 Partner Oper Port Number 1 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Console PORT CONFIGURATION Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic for each port Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default The default threshold is 500 packets per second Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic The specified threshold applie
53. Any Any 2048 65535 Any Remove Paton Pome Source Address Type Any 2 Source MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Source Bit Mask f0 00 00 00 00 00 Destination Address Type Any gt Destination MAC Address Remove Destination Bn Mask wip MID Bit Mask Ethemet Type Ethemet Type Bit Mask Packet Format Any gt m la Figure 3 44 ACL Configuration MAC ACCESS CONTROL LISTS CLI This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 4 135 Console config mac acl Configuring ACL Masks You must specify masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You must also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types i e Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Command Usage e Up to seven entries can be assigned to an ACL mask e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the A
54. Bie aes aa NE 4 212 spanning tree mode 1 6 eee eee 4 213 spanning tree forward time 0 cee eee eee 4 214 spanning tree hello time 6 eee eee 4 215 spamning tree Max age 6 eee 4 216 spanning tree priority 6 6 eee ee eee 4 217 spanning tree pathcost method 0 eee eee eee 4 217 spanning tree transmission limit 00 0 6 6c cece 4 218 spanning tree mst configuration 6 eee ee eee 4 219 Ms a A eh 4 219 xiii CONTENTS St PUOHY AR A e A MAING ea IA PEVISION bs DAMOS A AS he ar aes Id spanning tree spanning disabled oooooooommmm m r o Spanning tree cost Iy Aa A hac Bee a hos spanning tree port priority 6 6 eee eee spanning tree edge pott 6 6 eee eee eee spanning tree portfast 6 eee eee spanning tree link type 6 eee spanning tree MSt COSt 2 6 eee eee eee spanning tree mst port priofity oooooocooommmmm eee spanning tree protocol migration 0 e ee eee show spanning tree necra saai eee eee eee show spanning tree mst configuration oooooocoooooo VLAN Commands ines Jato Oe cea ae ts Geib a allel Editing VLAN Groups 1 2 0 n aa eee eee vlan database incall ct A aid BA dba id eS VIA oad a gee Did O O e Configuring VLAN Interfaces 0 0 intettace Vanes id a switchport Mode e saes a eee ees switchport acceptable frame types o oooooommm switchport ingress filtering o ooooooooommmoo switchport native vlan 2
55. CLI to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 4 Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a Web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connection BOOTP or DHCP protocol See Setting an IP Address on page 2 10 2 Set user names and passwords using an out of band serial connection Access to the Web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Setting Passwords on page 2 9 3 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program 3 1 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 2 Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated If you log into the Web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin E
56. CONFIGURATION Web Click System Log SMTP Enable SMTP specify a source email address and select the minimum severity level To add an IP address to the SMTP Server List type the new IP address in the SMTP Server field and click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the SMTP Server List and click Remove Specify up to five email addresses to receive the alert messages and click Apply SMTP Admin Status F Enabled Email Source Address bill company com Severity 4 Weming Y SMTP Server List New 192 168 1 4 lt Add 19216915 SMTP Server Remove Email Destination Address List New joe company com Add Email Destination Address Remove Figure 3 18 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts 3 39 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Enter the IP address of at least one SMTP server set the syslog severity level to trigger an email message and specify the switch source and up to five recipient destination email addresses Enable SMTP with the logging sendmail command to complete the configuration Use the show logging sendmail command to display the current SMTP configuration Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 4 4 66 Console config logging sendmail level 4 4 67 Console config logging sendmail source email bill company com 4 67 Console config logging sendmail destination email joe company com 4 68 Console config logging sendmail 4 69 Console config exit Console show logging s
57. Console copy tftp public key TFTP server IP address 192 168 1 19 Choose public key type 1 RSA 2 DSA lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name steve pub Username steve TFTP Download Success Write to FLASH Programming Success Console delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete unit filename filename Name of the configuration file or image name unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If the file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted e Factory_Default_Config cfg cannot be deleted A colon is required after the specified unit number 4 87 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memory Console delete test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 4 88 delete public key 4 51 dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir 121 boot rom config opcode f enamel The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file config Switch configuration file opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of the file or image If this file exists but contains errors information on this file cannot be shown e unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 88 FLasH F
58. Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx timeout re authperiod 300 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period This command sets the time that the switch waits during an authentication session before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dotlx timeout tx period seconds no dotlx timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period 300 Console config if show dot1x This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch ot a specific interface Syntax show dotlx statistics interface cnterface e statistics Displays dot1x status for each port 4 110 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS interface ethernet wnit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the following information Global 802 1 X Parameters Shows whether or not 802 1X port authentication is globally enabled on the switch 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface that has enabled 802 1X including the following items Status Administrative state for port access control
59. Level Traffic Type Priority Level Traffic Type 7 Network Control 3 Flash 6 Internetwork Control 2 Immediate 5 Critical 1 Priority 4 Flash Override 0 Routine Command Attributes IP Precedence Priority Table Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Web Click Priority IP Precedence Priority Select an entry from the IP Precedence Priority Table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field and then click Apply IP Precedence Priority IP Precedence 0 CoS 0 IP Precedence 1 CoS 1 IP Precedence 2 CoS 2 IP Precedence 3 CoS 3 IP Precedence 4 CoS 4 IP Precedence 5 CoS5 IP Precedence 6 CoS6 IP Precedence 7 CoS 7 Class of Serice Value 0 7 lo Restore Default IP Precedence Priority Table Figure 3 88 IP Precedence Priority 3 194 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION CLI The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 on port 1 and then displays the IP Precedence settings Console config map ip precedence 4 269 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 174 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 4 270 Console config if end Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 1 4 274 Precedence mapping status disabled Port
60. MST instance Range 1 4093 The other global attributes are described under Displaying Global Settings page 3 144 The attributes displayed by the CLI for individual interfaces are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 149 3 157 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 158 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP VLAN Configuration Select an instance identifier from the list set the instance priority and click Apply To add the VLAN members to an MSTI instance enter the instance identifier the VLAN identifier and click Add MSTP VLAN Configuration MST Instance ID 0 Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 4096 0 0030F1DFICAD Bridge ID 4096 0 0030F 1DF9CAD Root Port o Max Age 20 Root Path Cost O Hello Time 5 Configuration Changes 3 Forward Delay 20 Last Topology Change 0 d 16 h 13 min 39 Priority 0 61440 4096 MSTP VLAN Configuration VLAN in MST instance VLAN 1 VLAN 2 Remove VLAN 3 Remove VLAN 4 IVLANS zj MST ID 0 4094 VLAN ID Add Figure 3 69 MSTP VLAN Configuration SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This displays STA settings for instance 1 followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree mst 2 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enabled Instance i2 Vlans configuration 2 Priority 4096 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 R
61. Manager Community String Specifies a valid community string for the new trap manager entry Though you can set this string in the Trap Managers table we recommend that you define this string in the SNMP Configuration page for Version 1 or 2c clients or define a corresponding User Name in the SNMPv3 Users page for Version 3 clients Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Trap UDP Port Specifies the UDP port number used by the trap manager Trap Version Indicates if the user is running SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Default v1 Enable Authentication Traps Issues a trap message to specified IP trap managers whenever authentication of an SNMP request fails Default Enabled Enable Link up and Link down Traps Issues a trap message whenever a port link is established or broken Default Enabled 3 49 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click SNMP Configuration Enter the IP address and community string for each management station that will receive trap messages specify the UDP port and SNMP version and then click Add Select the trap types required using the check boxes for Authentication and Link up down traps and then click Apply Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current New Trap Manager IP Address 192 168 1 19 lt lt Add Trap Manager Community String private none Remove Trap UDP Port 162 Trap Version 1 Enable Authentication Traps M Enable Link up and Link down Traps
62. Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Current root port Current root cost 200000 Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec 645 Transmission limit 23 Path Cost Method long Eth 1 1 information Admin status enabled Role designate State forwarding External admin path cost 100000 Internal admin path cost 100000 External oper path cost 100000 Internal oper path cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 1 Designated root 4096 0 0030F1DF9CAO Designated bridge 4096 0 0030F1DF9CAO Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions 2 Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled 3 161 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages Field Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 149 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradi
63. Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address CRC Alignment Errors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error 64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 3 131 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 132 Web Click Port Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the scr
64. NO The entry number for each resource record FLAG The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable TYPE This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry IP The IP address associated with this record TIL The time to live reported by the name server DOMAIN The domain name associated with this record clear dns cache This command clears all entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console Console clear dns cache Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE EP TEL DOMAIN 4 172 INTEREACE COMMANDS Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN Table 4 45 Interface Commands switchport operational status of an interface Command Function Mode Page interface Configures an interface type and GC 4 174 enters interface configuration mode description Adds a description to an interface IC 4 174 configuration speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex IC 4 175 operation of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given IC 4 176 interface capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given IC 4 177 interface
65. Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk 1 0 8 2 fo 8 3 b 8 4 o 8 5 o 8 6 pP 8 7 fo 8 z Figure 3 83 Default Port Priority CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 3 4 174 Console config if switchport priority default 5 4 260 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 3 4 186 Information of Eth 1 3 Broadcast threshold LACP status Ingress rate limit Egress rate limit VLAN membership mode Ingress rule Acceptable frame type Native VLAN GVRP status Allowed VLAN Forbidden VLAN Console Priority for untagged traffic Enabled 500 packets second Disabled Disable 1000M bits per second Disable 1000M bits per second Hybrid Disabled All frames ab 5 Disabled 1 u 3 187 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 188 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using eight priority queues for each port with service schedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Table 3 11 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Priority 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p
66. OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE USE PERFORMANCE FAILURE OR INTERRUPTION OF ITS PRODUCTS EVEN IF SMC OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR CONSUMER PRODUCTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE TAKEN TO AFFECT YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS SMC will provide warranty service for one year following discontinuance from the active SMC price list Under the limited lifetime warranty internal and external power supplies fans and cables are covered by a standard one year warranty from date of purchase SMC Networks Inc 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 iti LIMITED WARRANTY iv CONTENTS Introduction IA A A 1 1 Wey Features oi A lr ia bee 1 1 Description of Software Features 1 0 0 0 cee cece eee 1 2 System Defaults is it di Hatt fe A ash ae 1 7 Initial Configuration o oooooooomm o eee eee 2 1 Connecting to the Switch rmac Dic a et bad 2 1 Configuration OPUS s aida a Wage tea ed Wage 2 1 Required Connections 0 2 2 Retriote Connections 20 06 co a LS a eae 2 4 Stack Operations uri ape hades Sica velar TA an aes ade es 2 5 Selecting the Stack Master 1 0 0 0 c eee eee
67. Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or 3 190 Weighted Round Robin Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin 3 191 queueing IP Precedence Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP 3 193 DSCP Priority Status Priority or disables both IP Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority mapping 3 193 the precedence tag to a class of service value IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point 3 195 priority mapping a DSCP tag to a class of service value IP Port Priority Status Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority 3 197 IP Port Priority Sets TCP UDP port priority defining the 3 197 socket number and associated class of service value NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page ACL CoS Priority Sets the CoS value and corresponding 3 199 output queue for packets matching an ACL rule ACL Marker Change traffic priorities for frames 3 201 matching an ACL rule IGMP Snooping 3 201 IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering configures 3 202 parameters for multicast query Multicast Router Displays the ports that are attached to a 3 205 Port Information neighboring multicast router for each VLAN ID Static Multicast Router Assigns ports that are attached to a 3 206 Port Configuration neighboring multicast router IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this 3 207 Table switch inc
68. RFC 2030 SSH Version 2 0 TFTP RFC 1350 Management Information Bases A 4 Bridge MIB RFC 1493 DNS Resolver MIB RFC 1612 Entity MIB RFC 2737 Ether like MIB RFC 2665 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extensible SNMP Agents MIB RFC 2742 Forwarding Table MIB RFC 2096 IGMP MIB RFC 2933 Interface Group MIB RFC 2233 Interfaces Evolution MIB RFC 2863 IP Multicasting related MIBs MAU MIB RFC 2668 MIB II RFC 1213 Port Access Entity MIB IEEE 802 1X Private MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIB RFC 2621 RMON MIB RFC 2819 RMON II Probe Configuration Group RFC 2021 partial implementation SNMP framework MIB RFC 2571 SNMP MPD MIB RFC 2572 SNMP Target MIB SNMP Notification MIB RFC 2573 SNMP User Based SM MIB RFC 2574 SNMP View Based ACM MIB RFC 2575 SNMP Community MIB RFC 2576 TACACS Authentication Client MIB TCP MIB RFC 2013 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS Trap REC 1215 UDP MIB REC 2012 A 5 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS A 6 APPENDIX B TROUBLESHOOTING Problems Accessing the Management Interface Symptom Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Action Cannot connect using Telnet web browser ot SNMP softwate Be sure the switch is powered up Check network cabling between the management station and the switch Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled Be sure you have configured
69. Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities based on an ACL rule Example Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if match access list mac a set priority 0 Console config if Related Commands show marking 4 132 ACL Information Table 4 38 ACL Information Command Function Mode Page show access list Shows all ACLs and associated tules PE 4 145 show access group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4 145 4 144 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS show access list This command shows all ACLs and associated rules as well as all the user defined masks Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Example Console show access list IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255 IP extended access list bob permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 80 permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any protocol tcp control code 2 2 MAC access list jerry permit any host 00 30 29 94 34 de ethertype 800 800 IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ing
70. Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 2 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 dO h O min 35 s Figure 3 65 STA Information CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enable disable nstance Vlans configuration Priority Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age sec sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time Transmission limit Path Cost Method sec RSTP enabled 0 1 4093 32768 22 20 125 22 20 sath 20 2210 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 gall 200000 dt 213380 23 long Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network 3 143 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage Spanning Tree Algorithm Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network
71. SMC Networks Inc Other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders LIMITED WARRANTY Limited Warranty Statement SMC Networks Inc SMC warrants its products to be free from defects in workmanship and materials under normal use and service for the applicable warranty term All SMC products carry a standard 90 day limited warranty from the date of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller SMC may at its own discretion repair or replace any product not operating as warranted with a similar or functionally equivalent product during the applicable warranty term SMC will endeavor to repair or replace any product returned under warranty within 30 days of receipt of the product The standard limited warranty can be upgraded to a Limited Lifetime warranty by registering new products within 30 days of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller Registration can be accomplished via the enclosed product registration card or online via the SMC web site Failure to register will not affect the standard limited warranty The Limited Lifetime warranty covers a product during the Life of that Product which is defined as the period of time during which the product is an Active SMC product A product is considered to be Active while it is listed on the current SMC price list As new technologies emerge older technologies become obsolete and SMC will at its discretion replace a
72. SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption e You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Consolettip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console configure Console config ip ssh server Console config Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 51 show ssh 4 54 ip ssh timeout This command configures the timeout for the SSH server Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation Range 1 120 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase Once an SSH session has been established the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec timeout command for vty sessions Example Console config ip ssh timeout 60 Console config Related Commands exec timeout 4 18 show ip ssh 4 54 4 49 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip ssh authentication retries This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user Use the no form to restore the default se
73. Sort by address vlan or interface Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types Learned Dynamic address entries Permanent Static entry Delete on reset Static entry to be deleted when system is reset The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC address Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit 0 means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit For 4 208 ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS example a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 00 00 00 00 17 Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE Console 1 Learned 1 Delete on reset mac address table aging time This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac address table aging time seconds no mac address table aging time seconds Aging time Range 10 1000000 seconds 0 to disable aging Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The aging time is used to
74. System Plus TACACS TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS compliant devices on the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads Glossary 7 GLOSSARY User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 8 Numerics 802 1X port authentication 4 104 A
75. The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN 3 201 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Quety 3 202 IGMP Snooping and Query If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and Query page 3 202 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier i e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on your switch page 3 206 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch page 3 208 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently Based on the IGMP query and report messages the swit
76. Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority 1 e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Admin Path Cost This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 3 154 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines
77. Usage Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above and Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 3 5 HTTPS Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 66 3 65 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 66 Command Attributes HTTPS Status Allows you to enable disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch Default Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number S
78. a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This switch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol e Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs 3 164 VLAN CONFIGURATION Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unawate devices Priority tagging Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports ar
79. all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command resets the entire system Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y This command returns to Privileged Exec mode Default Setting None 4 29 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console exit This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Console exit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username quit This command exits the configuration program Default Setting None 4 30 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program Example This example shows how
80. assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS Command Attributes Static Address Counts The number of manually configured addresses Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses Interface Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Static Addresses Static Address Counts D0 E0 29 94 34 DE VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Permanent Current Static Address Table Interface Port 1 le Trunk MAC Address DOKKEN VLAN Ma Add Static Address Remove Static Address Figure 3 62 Static Addresses CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 4 206 Console config 5 Web Only 3 135 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned b
81. at the Privileged Exec level and only allow you to display information and use basic utilities To fully configure the switch parameters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into the CLI at the Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts 2 At the Username prompt enter admin BASIC CONFIGURATION 3 At the Password prompt also enter admin The password characters are not displayed on the console screen 4 The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwords for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privileged Exec level 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt 3 Type username guest password 0 passw
82. by entering 1 to 26 hexadecimal characters If less than 26 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the value For example the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 22 zeroes Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Engine ID Enter an ID of up to 26 hexadecimal characters and then click Save SNMPv3 Engine ID Engine ID 80000034030030f b0e7a00000 Default Save Figure 3 26 Setting the SNMPv3 Engine ID CLI This example sets an SNMPv3 engine ID Console config ksnmp server engine id local 12345abcdef 4 154 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id 4 155 Local SNMP engineID 800000ca030030f1df9ca00000 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Console 3 51 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read and a write view Command Attributes 3 52 User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data
83. command to specify each server To send email alerts the switch first opens a connection sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one and finally closes the connection To open a connection the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection or the first server configured by this command If it fails to send mail the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again If it still fails the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection Example Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 19 Console config 4 66 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages Syntax logging sendmail level eve level One of the system message levels page 4 58 Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Default 7 Default Setting Level 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The specified level indicates an event threshold All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail level 3 Console conf
84. comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP A standard host to host mail transport protocol that operates over TCP port 25 Glossary 6 GLOSSARY Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Algorithm STA A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Terminal Access Controller Access Control
85. config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point spanning tree mst cost This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst nstance_id cost cost no spanning tree mst ustance_id cost instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes cost Path cost for an interface Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 4 229 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Each spanning tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs This command is used by the multiple spanning tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to interfaces attached to f
86. configuring 3 208 4 277 displaying 3 207 4 279 multicast static router port 3 206 4 285 P password line 4 16 passwords 2 9 administrator setting 3 59 4 34 path cost 3 141 3 151 method 3 146 4 217 STA 3 141 3 151 4 217 port authentication 4 104 port priority configuring 3 186 4 259 default ingress 3 186 4 261 STA 3 151 4 226 port security configuring 3 74 4 101 port statistics 3 127 4 184 ports autonegotiation 3 106 4 176 broadcast storm threshold 3 123 4 181 capabilities 3 106 4 177 duplex mode 3 105 4 175 flow control 3 105 4 178 forced selection on combo ports 3 104 4 179 speed 3 105 4 175 ports configuring 3 102 4 173 ports mirroring 3 125 4 188 priority default port ingress 3 186 4 261 problems troubleshooting B 1 protocol migration 3 155 4 232 INDEX Q queue weights 3 191 4 262 R RADIUS logon authentication 4 94 rate limits setting 3 126 4 190 remote logging 4 61 restarting the system 3 41 4 29 RSTP 3 138 4 213 global configuration 3 140 4 213 S secure shell 3 67 4 44 Secure Shell configuration 3 67 4 49 4 50 serial port configuring 4 13 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP SNMP 3 45 community string 3 47 4 149 enabling traps 3 48 4 153 trap manager 3 48 4 151 software displaying version 3 14 4 81 downloading 3 23 4 84 Spanning Tree Protocol See STA specifications software A 1 SSH configuring 3 67 4 49 4 50 STA 3 138 4 210 edge port 3
87. devices that exist on another network segment Use the no form to remove the static route Syntax ip default gateway gateway no ip default gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment Example The following example defines a default gateway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 1 254 Console config IP INTERFACE COMMANDS Related Commands show ip redirects 4 291 show ip interface This command displays the settings of an IP interface Default Setting All interfaces Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console Related Commands show ip redirects 4 291 show ip redirects This command shows the default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console Related Commands If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain 4 289 4 291 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ping 4 292 This command sends
88. earlier products 3 151 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 152 Admin Edge Port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or STA Trunk Information STA Port Information Port Frigg STASIS rra Cost ae Port OPE Path Cost Link Type ledge Pot POR ombor 1 Enabled Forwarding 2 0 4095 0 0030F 10F9CA 128 1 100000 Point to Point Disabled Designated 2 Enabled Discarding 0 0 4096 0 0030F 1 DF 128 2 10000 Point to Poin
89. eee ee eee 2 5 Master Backup Unit pre aona OS ee ea a pels 2 6 Recovering from Stack Failure or Topology Change 2 6 Broken Link for Line and Wrap around Topologies 2 6 IP Interface for Stack Management 005 2 7 Resilient Configuration 2 0 0 0 6 c ccc ee ee eee 2 8 Renumbering the Stack s siec dek aeih a Ensina 2 8 Basic Connouration fatal dida e ad a ed a eee 2 8 Console Connection Aiello agate liado 2 8 Setting Passwords a a a eet eth 2 9 Settino an IP Address o As 2 10 Manual Configuration 0 0 0 eee eee 2 10 Dynamic Configuration 2 6 0 6 06 cece eee eee 2 11 Enabling SNMP Management Access 0 0000005 2 12 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients 2 13 A costes A etek bette 2 14 Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients 2 14 Saving Configuration Settings 00 0 0 eee ee eee eee 2 15 Managing System Files sss sesos nest ve ee eee ved rs da 2 16 Configuring the Switch oooooooooooo o 3 1 Using the Web Interface enana nt ana ees 3 1 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 0 0 0 0 0 cece ee eee 3 3 O creates Sect 3 3 CONTENTS Configuration Options 6 0 6 eee eee 3 4 Panel Display 4 wigs tibetan age ete dad Ua sae Hameed la ee 3 4 Main Menur A ch ra ee ae ede 3 5 Basic Contisuration 4 4 0 5 A da 3 12 Displaying System Information 0 00 srne ee eee 3 12 Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions
90. enabled if one of the active links fails All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in the Member List on the Trunk Membership menu See page 3 110 Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Unit Port New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Port Port identifier Range 1 24 48 Web Click Port LACP Configuration Select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New Uniti Port Unitl Port2 Unit Port3 Unit Port4 lt Add unit 1 Unit Port5 Remove Pon 1 Unitl Port6 Figure 3 52 LACP Trunk Configuration PORT CONFIGURATION CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6 Just connect these ports to LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 1 4 174 Console config if Htlacp 4 194 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 4 183 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 22 22 22 22 22 2d Configur
91. end Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized yes 1 2 enabled Single Host Auto yes 1 48 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a USER AUTHENTICATION Displaying 802 1X Statistics This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Table 3 6 802 1X Statistics Parameter Description Rx EAPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Id The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MA
92. have to include an active port member of a VLAN interface used for management access After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access the onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above or from a network computer using SNMP network management software Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software STACK OPERATIONS Stack Operations Up to eight 24 port or 48 port Gigabit switches can be stacked together as described in the Installation Guide One unit in the stack acts as the Master for configuration tasks and firmware upgrade All of the other units function in Slave mode but can automatically take over management of the stack if the Master unit fails To configure any unit in the stack first verify the unit number from the front panel of the switch and then select the appropriate unit number from the web or console management interface Selecting the Stack Master Note the following points about unit numbering When the stack is initially powered on the Master unit is designated as unit 1 for a ring
93. hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config if garp timer join 20 Console config if garp timer leave 90 Console config if garp timer leaveall 2000 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if 4 174 4 241 4 242 4 243 4 256 4 257 4 240 Configuring Private VLANs 3 180 Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Uplink Ports Primary VLAN promiscuous ports Downlink Ports Secondary VLAN private ports VLAN CONFIGURATION Enabling Private VLANs Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable disable the Private VLAN function Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Status Select Enabled and click Apply Private VLAN Status Private VLAN Status I Enabled Figure 3 79 Private VLAN Status CLI This example enables private VLANs Console config pvlan 4 247 Console config Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports Use the Private VLA
94. indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Command Attributes Current Time Displays the current time Name Assigns a name to the time zone Range 1 29 characters Hours 0 13 The number of hours before after UTC 3 43 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 44 Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after UTC e Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or after west UTC Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply Clock Time Zone Note The maximum value is 13 00 Current Time Jan 2 01 49 04 2001 Name fure Hours 0 13 ooo Minutes 0590 p _ Direction C Before UTC Aer UTC Figure 3 22 Setting the Time Zone CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config iHclock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after UTC 4 73 Console config SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SN MP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems Managed
95. join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enable or disable GVRP and click Apply GVRP Status GVRP M Enable Figure 3 72 Enabling GVRP Status CLI This example enables GVRP for the switch Console config bridge ext gvrp 4 254 Console config Displaying Basic VLAN Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes VLAN CONFIGURATION e VLAN Version Number The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number 1 Maximum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Figure 3 73 VLAN Basic Information CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 255 Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic
96. looking for further contact information please visit www smc com www smec europe com or WWW smc asia com SMC Networks 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 Phone 949 679 8000 Model Numbers SMC8724M SMC8748M Pub Number 1502000410004 Revision Number F1 0 0 4 E102004 RO1 SMC Networks 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 Phone 949 679 8000
97. loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STA or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STA Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU e STA BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments 6 STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames and will cross any VLAN boundaries 3 144 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Command Att
98. mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin The system will now display the Console command prompt You can also enter 47 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged level password super page 4 36 To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following user names and passwords Username admin Password admin login password CLI session with the SMC8748M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Username guest Password guest login password CLI session with the SMC8748M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console enable Password privileged level password Console Configuration Commands 4 8 Configuration commands ate privileged level commands used to modify switch settings These commands mo
99. mst configuration Console config mstp Related Commands mst vlan 4 219 mst priority 4 221 name 4 222 revision 4 222 max hops 4 223 mst vlan This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance Use the no form to remove the specified VLANs Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all VLANs Syntax no mst nstance_ d vlan vlan range instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e vlan range Range of VLANs Range 1 4093 Default Setting none 4 219 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 220 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MSTI 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 58 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 4 222 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP
100. names and passwords can be configured locally or can be verified v a a remote authentication server i e RADIUS or TACACS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1X protocol This protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request user credentials from the 802 1X client and then verifies the client s right to access the network via an authentication server 1 e RADIUS server Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the web SSH for secure management access over a Telnet equivalent connection SNMP v3 IP addtess filtering for SNMP Web Telnet management access and MAC addtess filtering for port access Access Control Lists ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type ACLs can by used to improve performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic or to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols Port Configuration You can manually configure the speed duplex mode and flow control used on specific ports or use auto negotiation to detect the connection settings used by the attached device Use the full duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of switch connections Flow control should also be enabled to control network traffic during periods of con
101. of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight 0 1 1 2 2 4 3 6 4 8 5 10 6 12 7 14 4 265 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show queue cos map This command shows the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos map interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 01 23 4 5 6 7 Priority Queue 20134567 Console 4 266 PRIORITY COMMANDS Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Table 4 66 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map ip port Enables TCP UDP class of service GC 4 268 mapping map ip port Maps TCP UDP socket to a class of IC 4 268 service map ip precedence Enables IP precedence class of service GC 4 269 mapping map ip precedence Maps IP precedence value to a class of IC 4 270 service map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service GC 4 271 mapping map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4 272 map access list ip Sets the CoS value and corresponding IC 4 129 output queue for packets matching an ACL tule map access list mac Sets the CoS value and corresponding IC 4 142 output queue for packets matching an ACL tule show map ip port Shows the IP port map PE 4 273 sh
102. of system messages to a remote server or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging Use the no form to disable remote logging Syntax logging trap evel no logging trap level One of the level arguments listed below Messages sent include the selected level up through level 0 Refer to the table on page 4 58 Default Setting e Disabled e Level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the minimum severity level to be saved e Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging but restores the minimum severity level to the default Example Console config logging trap 4 Console config 4 61 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clear log This command cleats messages from the log buffer Syntax clear log flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memoty e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear log Console Related Commands show log 4 64 show logging This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local switch memory to an SMTP event handler or to a remote syslog server Syntax
103. port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC ACL mode MAC ACL filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 4 114 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS The following restrictions apply to ACLs This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL e When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail e Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 e However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound the ports should not exceed 20 You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in an ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail e Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets
104. port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Console show lacp 1 sysid Channel group System Priority System MAC Address 1 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 2 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 3 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 4 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 5 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 6 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 7 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 8 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 9 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 10 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 11 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 12 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 Table 4 53 show lacp sysid display description Field Description Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch System Priority LACP system priority for this channel group System MAC System MAC address Address The LACP system priority and system MAC address ate concatenated to form the LAG system ID 4 205 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Address Table Commands These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Table 4 54 Address Table Co
105. port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL ACCESS CONTROL LISTS e When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in an ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail Command Attributes e Port Fixed port or SFP module Range 1 24 48 IP Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port MAC Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port e IN ACL for ingress packets e OUT ACL for egress packets ACL Name Name of the ACL Web Click Security ACL Port Binding Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for ingress or egress traffic select the required ACL from the drop down list then click Apply ACL Port Binding IP MAC IN IN OUT M Enable david I Enable davic M Enable jeny x I Enable jerry z M Enable david F Enable david F Enable erry z I Enable jerry z I Enable davic O Enable erry z I Enable fiery z T Enable da d zj 0 Enable erry F Enable f
106. ports by using schedul respectively ing weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 for queues 0 7 PRIORITY COMMANDS Default Setting Weighted Round Robin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Example The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict Console config switchport priority default This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax switchport priority default defau t priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The priority number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 261 COMMAND LIN
107. ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Root Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states 1 e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Max hops The max number of hop counts for the MST region Remaining hops The remaining number of hop counts for the MST instance Transmission limit The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Information Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 0000ABCD0000 Bridge ID 32768 0000ABCD0000
108. prioritized based on the priority bits in the IP frame s Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP UDP port When these services are enabled the SYSTEM DEFAULTS priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Multicast Filtering Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee real time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration System Defaults The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Default_Config cfg To reset the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file page 3 25 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parametet Default Console Port Baud Rate auto Connection Data bits 8 Stop bits l Parity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled 1 7 INTRODUCTION Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin Password admin Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec from Password super Norm
109. priority use the set priority keywords The IP frame header also includes priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet The Type of Service octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service To specify the IP precedence priority use the set tos keywords To specify the DSCP priority use the set dscp keywords Note that the IP frame header can include either the IP Precedence or DSCP priority type The precedence for priority mapping by this switch is IP Precedence ot DSCP Priority and then 802 1p priority Example Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if match access list ip bill set dscp 0 Console config if Related Commands show marking 4 132 show marking This command displays the current configuration for packet marking Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show marking Interface ethernet 1 12 match access list IP bill set DSCP 0 match access list MAC a set priority 0 Console Related Commands match access list ip 4 131 4 132 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS MAC ACLs Table 4 36 MAC ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters GC 4 134 configuration mode permit deny Filters packets matching a specified MAC ACL 4 135 source and destination address packet format and Ethernet type show mac access list Di
110. private Console config Note If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings If there are no community strings then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c clients is disabled Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch To configure a trap receiver use the snmp server host command From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server host host address community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv where host address is the IP address for the trap receiver and community string specifies access rights for a version 1 2c host or is the user name of a version 3 host version indicates the SNMP client version and auth noauth priv means that authentication no authentication or authentication and privacy is used for v3 clients Then press lt Enter gt For a more detailed description of these parameters snmp server host on page 4 151 The following example creates a trap host for each type of SNMP client Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 98 robin version 2c Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 34 barbie version 3 auth Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients y
111. replace the downed link However if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port e Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 4 200 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS show lacp This command displays LACP information Syntax show lacp port channel counters internal neighbors sys id e port channel Local identifier for a link aggregation group Range 1 6 counters Statistics for LACP protocol messages internal Configuration settings and operational state for local side neighbors Configuration settings and operational state for remote side sys id Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups Default Setting Port Channel all Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show lacp 1 counters Channel group 1 LACPDUs Sent ah LACPDUs Receive 5 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 4 201 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 202 Table 4 50 show lacp count
112. required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Example The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps half duplex operation Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if speed duplex 100half config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 176 capabilities 4 177 negotiation 4 176 This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable autonegotiation Syntax no negotiation Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDI X pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports INTEREACE COMMANDS Example The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands capabilities 4 177 speed duplex 4 175 capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability
113. show snmp view display description 4 157 show snmp group display description 4 160 show snmp user display description 4 162 DNS Commands 0 ccc cece eee ees 4 163 Interface Commands 0 000 4 173 show interfaces switchport display description 4 187 Mirror Port Commands 000 0000 o 4 188 Rate Limit Commands 000000 c cee eee 4 190 Link Aggregation Commands o o ooooooooccco oo 4 192 show lacp counters display description 4 202 show lacp internal display description 4 202 show lacp neighbors display description 4 204 show lacp sysid display description 4 205 Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab e 4 54 e 4 55 e 4 56 e 4 57 e 4 58 e 4 59 e 4 60 e 4 61 e 4 62 e 4 63 e 4 64 e 4 65 e 4 66 e 4 67 e 4 68 e 4 69 e 4 70 e 4 71 e 4 72 e 4 73 e B 1 TABLES Address Table Commands o oooooomommmmom 4 206 Spanning Tree Commands 0 00000 4 210 VEAN Commands side tee i ee A iia 4 235 Editing VLAN Groups 0 0 0 2 0 0 e eee eee 4 236 Configuring VLAN Interfaces ooooooomom o 4 238 Displaying VLAN Information oooooccocoooo 4 246 Private VLAN Commands 0 00000 eee 4 247 Protocol based VLAN Commands 4 249 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4 25
114. spanning tree Shows spanning tree configuration for PE 4 233 the common spanning tree 1 e overall bridge a selected interface or an instance within the multiple spanning tree show spanning tree mst Shows the multiple spanning tree PE 4 235 configuration configuration spanning tree This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down Example This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree Console config 4 212 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree mode This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp mstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE
115. spanning tree edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command may be removed for future software versions Example Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Spanning tree portfast Console config 1f Related Commands spanning tree edge port 4 226 spanning tree link type This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no spanning tree link type e auto Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting point to point Point to point link shared Shared medium SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges e When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link while a half duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link RSTP only works on point to point links between two bridges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP this same restriction applies Example Console
116. static host name to address PE 4 170 mapping table 4 163 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 44 DNS Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page show dns Displays the configuration for DNS services PE 4 171 show dns cache Displays entries in the DNS cache PE 4 171 clear dns cache Clears all entries from the DNS cache PE 4 172 ip host This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an IP address Use the no form to remove an entry Syntax no ip host name address address2 address8 name Name of the host Range 1 64 characters address Corresponding IP address e address2 address Additional corresponding IP addresses Default Setting No static entries Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple 1P addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name using this command a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device 4 164 DNS COMMANDS Example This example maps two address to a host name Console config tip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address 10 1 0 55 192 168 1 55 Alias Console clear host This command deletes entries from the DNS table Syntax clear host name
117. such as GMRP GVRP Status Enables disables GVRP for the interface GVRP must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect See Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 16 When disabled any GVRP packets received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other ports Default Disabled GARP Join Timer The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate in a VLAN group Range 20 1000 centiseconds Default 20 e GARP Leave Timer The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range 60 3000 centiseconds Default 60 GARP LeaveAll Timer The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 500 18000 centiseconds Default 1000 9 Timer settings must follow this rule 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer 3 178 VLAN CONFIGURATION Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default Hybrid 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a
118. system clock It may be used if there is no time server on your network or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server Syntax calendar set hour min sec day month year month day year bour Hour in 24 hour format Range 0 23 min Minute Range O 59 sec Second Range 0 59 e day Day of month Range 1 31 month january february march april may june july august september october november december e year Year 4 digit Range 2001 2101 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows how to set the system clock to 15 12 34 February 1st 2002 Console calendar set 15 12 34 1 February 2002 Console show calendar This command displays the system clock Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show calendar 15 12 34 February 1 2002 Console 4 75 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE System Status Commands show startup config 4 76 Table 4 23 System Status Commands Command Function Mode Page show Displays the contents of the configuration file PE 4 76 startup config stored in flash memory that is used to start up the system show Displays the configuration data currently in PE 4 77 running config use show system Displays system information NE 4 80 PE show users Shows a
119. the IP port priority IP Port Priority Table Shows the IP port to CoS map IP Port Number TCP UDP Set a new IP port number e Class of Service Value Sets a CoS value for a new IP port Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP Port Priority Status Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled 3 197 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH IP Port Priority Status ip Port Priority Global Status T Enabled Figure 3 90 IP Port Priority Status Click Priority IP Port Priority Enter the port number for a network application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box and then click Apply IP Port Priority IP Port Priority Table IP Port Number TCP UDP feo Class of Service Value 0 7 om Remove IP Port Figure 3 91 IP Port Priority CLI The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch maps HTTP traffic on port 1 to CoS value 0 and then displays the IP Port Priority settings Console config map ip port 4 268 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 174 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 4 268 Console config if end Console show map ip port ethernet 1 1 4 273 TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 1 80 0 Console 3 198 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Note M
120. the Line i e session index number Example Console show users Username accounts Username Privilege Public Key admin 15 None guest 0 None steve T5 RSA Online users Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 14 14 EL VTY 0 admin 0 00 00 192 168 1 19 2 SSH 1 steve 0 00 06 192 168 1 19 Web online users Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time h m s 1 HTTP 192 168 1 19 admin 0 00 00 Console show version This command displays hardware and software version information for the system Default Setting None 4 81 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 3 14 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command Example Console show version Unit 1 Serial number Hardware version EPLD version Number of ports Main power status Agent master Unit ID Loader version Boot ROM version Console Redundant power status Operation code version A429048179 ROL 15 05 48 up not present PRRE ooo ohh AR w Frame Size Commands Table 4 24 Frame Size Commands Command Function Mode Page jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC 4 82 jumbo frame 4 82 This command enables support for jumbo frames Use the no form to disable it Syntax no jumbo frame Default Setting
121. the SSH server However note that you also need to install an SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 Table 4 15 Secure Shell Commands Command Function Mode Page ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4 48 ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the GC 4 49 SSH server ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed by a GC 4 50 authentication retries client ip ssh server key size Sets the SSH server key size GC 4 50 copy tftp public key Copies the user s public key from a TFTP PE 4 84 server to the switch delete public key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 4 51 ip ssh crypto Generates the host key PE 4 51 host key generate ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM PE 4 52 ip ssh save host key Saves the host key from RAM to flash PE 4 53 memoty disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 23 4 45 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 46 Table 4 15 Secure Shell Commands Continued and public key type Command Function Mode Page show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and PE 4 54 the configured values for authentication timeout and retries show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4 54 show public key Shows the public key for the specified user PE 4 55
122. the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the web see Configuring Interface Connections on page 3 48 The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 3 103 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Broadcast storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled Broadcast storm limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 500 262143 packets per second Flow control Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled Port Security Shows if port security is enabled or disabled Max MAC count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 1024 addresses Port security action Shows the response to take when a security violation is detected shutdown trap trap and shutdown Media type Shows the forced preferred port type to use for combination ports 21 24 45 48 copper forced copper preferred auto SFP forced SFP preferred auto Current status 3 104 Link Status Indicates if the link is up or down Operation speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Port operation status Provides detailed informat
123. the default Syntax max hops hop number hop number Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree Range 1 40 Default Setting 20 Command Mode MST Configuration 4 223 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage A MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols Therefore the message age for BPDUs inside a MSTI region is never changed However each spanning tree instance within a region and the internal spanning tree IST that connects these instances use a hop count to specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU Each bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU When the hop count reaches zero the message is dropped Example Console config mstp max hops 30 Console config mstp spanning tree spanning disabled 4 224 This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Syntax no spanning tree spanning disabled Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5 Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree spanning disabled Console config if SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified
124. the default You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac address table static command A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot use port monitoring Cannot be a multi VLAN port Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device Cannot be a trunk port If a port is disabled due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled using the no shutdown command Example The following example enables port security for port 5 and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message Console config tinterface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap Related Commands shutdown 4 180 mac address table static 4 206 show mac address table 4 208 4 103 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 802 1X Port Authentication The switch supports IEEE 802 1X dot1x port based access control that 4 104 prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol Table 4 32 802 1X Port Authentication Commands Command Function Mode Page dotlx Enables dot1x globally on the switch GC 4 105 system auth control dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their GC 4 105 default values dot1x max req Sets the maximum number of times IC 4 106 that the switch retransmit
125. the host key pair Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page USER AUTHENTICATION Web Click Security SSH Host Key Settings Select the host key type from the drop down box select the option to save the host key from memory to flash if required prior to generating the key and then click Generate qj_o lt gt gt joo oooOO SSH Host Key Settings Public Key of Host Key Host Key Type Both F Save Host Key from Memory to Flash _ Generate Clear Figure 3 33 SSH Host Key Settings 3 71 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 72 CLI This example generates a host key pair using both the RSA and DSA algorithms stores the keys to flash memory and then displays the host s public keys Console ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 48 Console ip ssh save host key 4 48 Console show public key host 4 48 Host RSA 1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761 8240969094744832010252487896597759216832222558465238779154647980739 6314033869257931051057652122430528078658854857892726029378660892368 4142327591212760325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511 729290510813919642025190932104328579045764891 DSA ssh dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6 zwIqCqDb3 86 9j YVXIME1LSHLOECE Re 6hlasfEthIwmjhLY400j qJUZpcEQUgC Ylum0Y2u0Lka Py9ieGWQ8 f 2gobUZKIICu Kg6vjO9XTs7XKc05xfzkBik
126. the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Enabled IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Range 5 25 seconds Default 10 IGMP Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 3 203 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH IGMP Version Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network Range 1 2 Default 2 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings as required and then click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration IGMP Query
127. the top to the bottom unit Using this kind of line topology if any link or unit in the stack STACK OPERATIONS fails the stack will be broken in two The Stack Link LED on the unit that is no longer receiving traffic from the next unit up in the stack will begin flashing to indicate that the stack link is broken When the stack fails a Master unit is selected from the two stack segments either the unit with the Master button depressed or the unit with the lowest MAC address if the Master button is not depressed on any unit The stack reboots and resumes operations However note that the IP address will be the same for any common VLANs with active port connections that appear in both of the new stack segments To resolve the conflicting IP addresses you should manually replace the failed link or unit as soon as possible If you are using a wrap around stack topology a single point of failure in the stack will not cause the stack to fail It would take two or more points of failure to break the stack apart Note Ifa stack breaks apart the IP address will be the same for any common VLANs with active port connections that appear in both stack segments IP Interface for Stack Management The stack functions as one integral system for management and configuration purposes You can therefore manage the stack through any unit in the stack The Master unit does not even have to include an active port member in the VLAN interface used fo
128. to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Table 4 62 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Command Function Mode Page bridge ext gvrp Enables GVRP globally for the GC 4 254 switch show bridge ext Shows the global bridge extension PE 4 255 configuration switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 256 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for IC 4 245 an interface show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for NE 4 256 the selected interface PE gatp timer Sets the GARP timer for the IC 4 257 selected function show gatp timer Shows the GARP timer for the NE 4 258 selected function PE bridge ext gvrp This command enables GVRP globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no bridge ext gvrp Default Setting Disabled 4 254 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Example Console config bridge ext gvrp
129. to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Example This example creates an IP ingress mask with two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console Console Console Console config access list ip mask precedence in config ip mask acl mask host any config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any config ip mask acl This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entty Console config taccess list ip standard A2 Console config std acl Hpermit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std acl exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl 4 125 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 126 This shows how to create a standard ACL with an ingress mask to deny access to the IP host 171 69 198 102 and permit access to any others Console config access list ip standard A2 Console config std acl permit any Console config std acl deny host 171 6
130. topology For a line topology the stack is simply numbered from top to bottom with the first unit 1 e the unit with no connection on the Up port in the stack designated as unit 1 This unit identification number appears on the Stack Unit ID LED on the front panel of the switch It can also be selected on the front panel graphic of the web interface or from the CLI If more than one stack Master is selected using the Master Slave push button on the switch s front panel the system will select the unit with the lowest MAC address as the Master If the Master unit fails and another unit takes over control of the stack the unit numbering will not change If a unit in the stack fails or is removed from the stack the unit numbers will not change This means that when you replace a unit in the stack the original configuration for the failed unit will be restored to the replacement unit If a unit is removed from the stack and later reattached to the stack it will retain the original unit number obtained during stacking 2 5 INITIAL CONFIGURATION e Ifa unit is removed from the stack and powered up as a stand alone unit it will also retain the original unit number obtained during stacking Master Backup Unit Once the Master unit finishes booting up the Slave unit in the stack with the lowest MAC address functions as the primary backup unit The stack Master immediately downloads all configuration information to the backup un
131. traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Table 4 48 Rate Limit Commands Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input or output IC 4 191 rate for a port RATE LiMIT COMMANDS rate limit This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit input output raze no rate limit input output input Input rate output Output rate rate Maximum value in Mbps Range 1 to 1000 Mbps Default Setting 1000 Mbps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit input 600 Console config 1f 4 191 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Link Aggregation Commands 4 192 Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link i e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you
132. traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e WLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router e Unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router MULTICAST FILTERING Web Click IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current New Viani Unit Portl Interface Port y i a VLAN ID 1z 7 Unit 1 move Por pZ Trunk a Figure 3 95 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration CLI This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 4 285 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 286 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service Command Attribute e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN for which to display port members e Multicast IP Address T
133. used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication standard GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol Glossary 2 GLOSSARY IEEE 802 10 VLAN Taggine Defines Ethernet fr
134. vlan 4 246 This command configures a VLAN Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan v an id name v an name media ethernet state active suspendj no vlan vian id name state vlan id ID of configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters media ethernet Ethernet media type state Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage no vlan v an id deletes the VLAN no vlan v an id name removes the VLAN name no vlan v an id state returns the VLAN to the default state i e active e You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch 4 237 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example adds a VLAN using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5 The VLAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 246 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Table 4 58 Configuring VLAN Interfaces default untagged frames Command Function Mode Page interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode fo
135. will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails 4 195 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows LACP enabled on ports 10 12 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces status port channel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established Console config interface ethernet 1 10 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type Mac address Configuration Name Port admin Speed duplex Capabilities Flow control Port security Max MAC count Current status Created by Link status Flow control type Member Ports Console Operation speed duplex 1000T 00 30 F1 D4 73 A4 Up Auto 10half 10full Disabled Disabled 0 100half 100full Lacp Up 1000full None Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 1000full 4 196 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS lacp system priority This command configures a port s LACP system priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp factor partner system priority priority no lacp actor partner system priority e actor The
136. 0 0 c cece eee 3 172 VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members 3 175 VLAN Static Membership by Pott 3 176 VLAN Port Configuration oooooccccocooomo 3 179 Private VLAN Status 0 0c ce cee eee eee 3 181 Private VLAN Link Status ooooooooooo o 3 182 Protocol VLAN Configuration 0008 3 184 Protocol VLAN Port Configuration 3 185 Default Port Priority io anos idiota AES 3 187 TrafticiClass Es a 2 bY wide eevee Bae Gae 3 189 Queu Mode siria 3 190 Queue Scheduling oooooccccccocooooocccco 3 191 IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status 3 193 TP Precedence Priotity cuco aid Hagan Hee Be eyes di tt 3 194 IP DSCP PHority ecient eet ee des aa 3 196 IP Port Priority Status 2 0 6 cece eee eee eee 3 198 LP Port Priority 4 aaa os 3 198 ACL C OS Priority n uir y AA RA sled ole Rea 3 200 IGMP Configuration 06 6 3 204 Multicast Router Port Information 3 205 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration 3 207 IP Multicast Registration Table oo o 3 208 IGMP Member Port Table o o ooooo o o 3 209 DNS General Configuration oooooooccccoooo 3 212 DNS Static Host Table ooo ooooooooo o o 3 214 DNS Cache vir Jaen ctl a dd RL EN A 3 216 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching It includes a management agent that allows you to configure
137. 0 00 00 00_00 lt stackingMac gt I lt stackingMac gt 00_00 00 00 00 00 00_00 lt stackingMac gt I lt stackingMac gt 00_00 00 00 00 00 00_00 lt stackingMac gt I lt stackingMac gt 00_00 00 00 00 00 00_00 lt stackingMac gt I lt stackingMac gt 00_00 00 00 00 00 00_00 lt stackingMac gt I lt stackingMac gt 00_00 00 00 00 00 00_00 lt stackingMac gt I lt stackingMac gt 00_00 00 00 00 00 00_00 lt stackingMac gt phymap 00 30 f1 df 9c a0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SNTP server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active spanning tree MST configuration interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface vlan 1 IP address 192 168 1 51 255 255 255 0 IP address DHCP no map IP precedence no map IP DSCP line console line vty end Console Related Commands show startup config 4 76 4 79 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show system 4 80 This command displays system information Default S
138. 1 eee eee switchport allowed vlan 1 1 0 eee eee eee switchport forbidden vlan oooooooooommmoo Displaying VLAN Information ooocococooccccccono SHOW Wath ii Ni Configuring Private VLANs 000 c eee eee eee PU ida cdi tes show pvlant e ie Mate Bim ARES Soham e Configuring Protocol based VLANS 000 0000 e eee protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces show protocol vlan protocol group ooooomm show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group CONTENTS GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands oooocooccoooocccc oo 4 254 Dridge extboviD dali A a lA da 4 254 show bridpesEXtuitiaii id dd dais 4 255 SWILCHPOTE EVED ii Pai AE O AR sd 4 256 show gvtp configuration 6 eee eee eee 4 256 Garp UEL y Ela atk SU AI oat A 4 257 show garp timers da ida Dis 4 258 Priority Commands is deriera aaa Ea A A ai 4 259 Priority Commands Layer 2 oooooocooommmmmo mo 4 260 Queue mode eaae tn ER 4 260 switchport priority default 0 0 0 0 4 261 queue Bandido a eee 4 262 qucus COS MAP a s 4 263 show queuemiode s prenia bed hets AS od chet Abe A 4 205 show queue bandwidth 0 00 eee eee eae 4 265 show queue COS Map 6 6 eee eee 4 266 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 oo oooommmmmo o o 4 267 map ip port Global Configuration oooo ooooo 4 268 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 2
139. 149 Configuring Interface Settings suus 0 0 eee eee eee 3 153 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees ooomommo mooo o 3 156 Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP 3 160 Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP 3 162 VLAN Confloutation iia dein tibet reid eee dant 3 164 IEEE 802 1Q VLANS 2 0 cece cece cence eee aa 3 164 Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting 3 168 Displaying Basic VLAN Information 3 168 Displaying Current VLANs 000000 e eee eee 3 169 Greating VEANS nt Aine Leis Ree a ie Se 3 171 Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index 3 173 Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index 3 175 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3 177 Configuring Private VLANs 00 c cee eee eee eee 3 180 Enabling Private VLANS 0 00 c eee cece eee 3 181 Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports 3 181 Configuring Protocol Based VLANs 0 0005 3 182 Configuring Protocol Groups oooo oooommmmm o 3 183 Mapping Protocols to VLANS 0 0c e eee eee 3 184 Class of Service Configuration 0 ccc cee eee 3 186 Layer 2 Queue Settings 0 6 eee eee 3 186 Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces 3 186 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues o o 3 188 Selecting the Queue Mode 00 00 eee ee 3 190 Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes 3 191 Laye
140. 169 170 171 171 172 173 174 174 175 176 177 CONTENTS inedia type A AA ate a A 4 179 Shutdown tdi a eS E A ET o 4 180 switchport broadcast packet rate oooooooooocommooo 4 181 cledr COUMtELS ii a a ies wees 4 182 show interfaces status 6 6 6 eee cece 4 183 show interfaces COUMtCIS 6 66 kee eee 4 184 show interfaces switchport 0 0 cece cece 4 186 Mirror Port Commands 0 eee eee 4 188 POLEMONILOE 24 Sra eet A a ASA fend 4 188 show Pott HOnItOr S32 tada capa oI AL pac dic 4 189 Rate Limit Commands ii cist id Said Oot iene ol doe ee 4 190 fate limit lt Aedes Aah a Dee Bae Wee 4 191 Link Aggregation Commands 00 ec c ec eeeeeee 4 192 Channel oroup lili Seago eee da ld oe eager big 4 194 lacp ciate aed dl tho aie fe Sandie 4 194 lacp system pHotity lt 42 0 fon A eee i Se EA 4 197 lacp admin key Ethernet Interface oooommmo m oo 4 198 lacp admin key Port Channel 0 000000 e ee 4 199 lacp portphotity aia ede died tis 4 200 Show A press ae syst O AA 4 201 Address Table Commands 0 000s 4 206 mac address table static 2 6 6 eee ee eee 4 206 clear mac address table dynamic 00000 4 207 show mac address table 6 cece eee eee 4 208 mac address table aging time 0 6 cece eee eee 4 209 show mac address table aging time oooooomocccocoooo 4 210 Spanning Tree Commands 1 0 0 cece 4 210 SPAMS CES IS ius teat se
141. 174 Console config if channel group 1 4 194 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 10 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 2 4 183 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 00 E8 AA AA 01 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Flow control Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Created by User Link status Down Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Console Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Command Usage To avoid creating a loop in the dynamically network be sure you enable LACP enabled before connecting the ports and also PTT disconnect the ports before disabling active backup LACP links q P link If the target switch has also enabled ne LACP on the connected ports the i f x configured trunk will be activated automatically members 3 111 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 112 A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available trunk ID Ifmote than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be
142. 1766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206 519417467729848654686157177393901647793559423035774130980227370877945452408397 1752646358058176716709574804776117 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH clients granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch with the username command as described on page 4 34 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 055536161631051775940838686311092912322268285192543746031009371877211996963178 136627741416898513204911720483033925432410163799759237144901193800609025394840 848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150453 06393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 Set the Optional Parameters Set other optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size Enable SSH Service Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH server on the switch Configure Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate
143. 255 255 Any Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Any Any Any Remove 255 255 255 0 Any Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Any Any Any Remove Remove All Entries Source Address Type Any Y Source Subnet Mask Destination Address Type Any Y Destination Subnet Mask Protocol Mask F Enabled Service Type Mask TOS Enabled F Precedence Enabled M DSCP Enabled Source Port Bit Mask 0 65535 Destination Pon Bit Mask 0 65535 Control Code Bit Mask 0 63 Add a Figure 3 46 ACL Mask Configuration IP 3 97 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 98 CLI This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules ate entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry Console config taccess list ip standard A2 4 117 Console config std acl Hpermit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 4 118 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std acl exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in 4 123 Console config ip mask acl mask host any 4 124 Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl Configuring a MAC ACL Mask This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Command Usage You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a por
144. 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config access list mac mask precedence out Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if mac access group M5 out Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console show access list mac mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs Syntax show access list mac mask precedence in out in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list mac mask precedence MAC egress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console Related Commands mask MAC ACL 4 138 4 140 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS mac access group This command binds a port to a MAC ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax mac access group acl_name in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets out Indicates that this list applies to egress packets Default S
145. 345 345 7 7 nm Note Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 11 CLI shows Queue ID 3 189 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 190 Selecting the Queue Mode You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Command Attributes WRR Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 for queues 0 through 7 respectively This is the default selection Strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues Web Click Priority Queue Mode Select Strict or WRR then click Apply Queue Mode Queue Mode Wr Figure 3 85 Queue Mode CLI The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict 4 265 Console conf
146. 4 Priority Commands 0 0 cee eee eee 4 259 Priority Commands Layer 2 0 0 ee eee 4 260 Default CoS Priority Levels ooooooooomoo 4 264 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 0 4 267 Mapping IP Precedence to CoS Values 4 270 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values ooo 4 272 Multicast Filtering Commands 0 0 4 276 IGMP Snooping Commands 0 00000 05 4 276 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 0 4 280 Static Multicast Routing Commands 4 285 IP Interface Commands 0 ce eee eee 4 287 Troubleshooting Chart 0 eee eee eee B 1 xix XX Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 FIGURES Home PAGE e do ee era Dr 3 3 Panel Display coords wae ade ed veces a noe 3 4 System Information 0 0 cece ee eee eee 3 13 Switch Information es e yisi 0 00 c cece eee 3 15 Bridge Extension Configuration ooooococo ooo 3 17 Manual IP Configuration 0 0 0 0 rrr 3 19 DHCP IP Configuration seser renren 3 20 Copy Firmware viii ici tada
147. 4 226 event logging 4 56 F firmware displaying version 3 14 4 81 upgrading 3 23 4 84 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway default 3 19 4 290 GVRP global setting 3 168 4 254 interface configuration 3 178 4 256 H hardware version displaying 3 14 4 81 HTTPS 3 65 4 41 HTTPS secure server 3 65 4 41 I IEEE 802 1D 3 138 4 213 IEEE 802 1s 4 213 IEEE 802 1w 3 138 4 213 IEEE 802 1X 4 104 IGMP groups displaying 3 207 4 279 Layer 2 3 202 4 276 query 3 202 4 281 query Layer 2 3 203 4 280 snooping 3 202 4 277 snooping configuring 3 202 4 276 ingress filtering 3 177 4 242 Index 2 IP address BOOTP DHCP 3 20 4 288 setting 2 10 3 18 4 288 IP port priority enabling 3 197 4 268 mapping priorities 3 197 4 268 IP precedence enabling 3 193 4 269 mapping priorities 3 193 4 270 J jumbo frame 4 82 L link type STA 3 152 3 155 4 228 logging syslog traps 4 61 to syslog servers 4 59 log in Web interface 3 3 logon authentication 3 58 4 91 RADIUS client 4 94 RADIUS server 4 94 TACACS client 3 61 4 98 TACACS server 3 61 4 98 logon authentication sequence 3 62 4 92 4 93 M main menu 3 5 Management Information Bases MIBs A 4 mirror port configuring 3 125 4 188 MSTP 4 213 global settings 3 156 4 211 interface settings 4 211 multicast filtering 3 201 4 276 multicast groups 3 207 4 279 displaying 4 279 static 3 207 4 277 4 279 multicast services
148. 4 30 A a at lado sd 4 30 System Management Commands 0 cece cece eee 4 31 Device Designation Commands 00 000 renn 4 32 PEC ate a MP ocr tes ie al ds A 4 32 Hostal OS od tote ONS aaa OM Sak gado Silas 4 33 switch renuimbetit i0icc dive cia Cabal a di at 4 33 User Access Commands 0 4 34 USA NA 4 34 enable pass wotd iia dd al PRE 4 36 IP Filter Commands sasian ee e a S a S 4 37 MANAS MENO Misco koat ade dei tha lee LE 4 37 show management 6 eee eee eee ee 4 38 Web Server Commands 6 00 c cece cece eens 4 39 ipshttp pore srie th E 4 40 ip Http Server ic lew eine e Daa es 4 40 ip http secure server 6 cee eee eee 4 41 viii CONTENTS ip http Securezportis Liria id ale es 4 42 Telnet Server Commands 0 006s 4 43 ip telnet Servera Ai 4 43 ip telnet server port sc wJas uae ii a 4 44 Secure Shell Commands 0 0 0 0 cece eee cece eee 4 44 tp ssh Serv EL ide tls Al brace cages ih acetate IN Seda 4 48 Pss h tUMeOuts id ieee ho inde oh Sate 4 49 ip ssh authentication retties 2 6 0 6 cece eee eee 4 50 ip ssh server key size cee eee 4 50 delete public key i222 siacgsut a did e 4 51 ip ssh crypto host key generate ooooomcccooommo 4 51 Ip SShCryptO ZerOlZe ii Sane alas hie aA Se R 4 52 ip ssh save host key 6 0 ee ee cee eee 4 53 show ip SS Hal n a aS hes 4 54 SHOW SSH wisi dst niao taa settle tat Set ete 4 54 show public key cocida aes ena ad
149. 40 configured from a browser ip http Enables HTTPS SSL for encrypted GC 4 41 secure server communications ip http secure port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC 4 42 SSL 4 39 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port portnumber no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 4 40 ip http server 4 40 This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console config Htip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 4 40 ip http secure server This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access 1 e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http secure server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Both HTTP and H
150. 5 6 7 Weight 124681012 14 IP Precedence Priority Disabled IP DSCP Priority Disabled IP Port Priority Disabled 1 9 INTRODUCTION 1 10 Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default IP Settings Management VLAN Any VLAN configured with an IP address IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Enabled DNS Server Disabled BOOTP Disabled Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Snooping Enabled Querier Disabled System Log Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels 0 7 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 SMTP Email Alerts Event Handler Enabled but no server defined SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled CHAPTER 2 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agent offers a variety of management options including SNMP RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 and a Web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring v a a command line interface CLI Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 2 10 The switch s HTTP Web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard Web browser such as
151. 6 tagged Console config if switchport forbidden vlan This command configures forbidden VLANs Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add v lan ist remove v an list no switchport forbidden vlan e add v an list List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove v an list List of VLAN identifiers to remove vlan list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4093 Default Setting No VLANs are included in the forbidden list Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP e Ifa VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface 4 245 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 3 Console config if Displaying VLAN Information Table 4 59 Displaying VLAN Information Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE 4 246 PE show interfaces status Displays status for the specified VLAN NE 4 183 vlan interface PE show interfaces
152. 68 map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 269 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 270 map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 271 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 272 show Map ip pOrt cee eee 4 273 show map ip precedence 6 6 eee eee ee eee 4 274 show map ip dsep ii a each os why he ode 4 275 Multicast Filtering Commands 0 eee eee 4 276 IGMP Snooping Commands 0 0 0 4 276 IPASMP SHOOPINGs 44s eta att 4 277 ip igmp snooping vlan static 6 eee eee eee 4 277 ip igmp snooping version 6 6 eee eee eee eee 4 278 show ip igmp snooping 6 eee eee 4 279 show mac address table multicast ooomo 4 279 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 1 0 0 ee eee eee 4 280 ip igmp snooping quetier 6 0 eee eee eee 4 281 ip igmp snooping query count 0 0 00 cee 4 281 ip igmp snooping query interval oooooooooooo 4 282 XV CONTENTS xvi ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 283 ip igmp snooping router port expire time 4 284 Static Multicast Routing Commands 00005 4 285 ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 0 000 000 08 4 285 show ip igmp snooping mrouter 0008 4 286 IP Interface Commands ocio at Line ee ee 4 287 Basic IP Configuration 0 4 287 ipaddress AA See Aunt SER ote geak ee Se 4 288 ip dC TEST di Bae Mao dates 4 289 ip defaul
153. 802 1w mstp Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 15 Default Setting rstp Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes that it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs 4 213 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances
154. 85 management access ACL 3 87 Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or 3 87 MAC addresses Mask Configuration Controls the order in which ACL rules are 3 95 checked Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3 100 Port 3 102 Port Information Displays port connection status 3 102 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3 102 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 105 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3 105 Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3 109 LACP 3 111 Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3 111 Aggregation Port Configures parameters for link aggregation 3 113 group members Port Counters Displays statistics for LACP protocol 3 116 Information messages Port Internal Displays settings and operational state for 3 118 Information local side Port Neighbors Displays settings and operational state for 3 121 Information remote side 3 7 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 8 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each 3 123 port Trunk Broadcast Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each 3 123 Control trunk Mirror Port Sets the source and target ports for 3 125 Configuration mitroring Rate Limit 3 126 Input Sets the input rate limit for each port 3 126 Port Configuration Inp
155. 9 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Security User Accounts To configure a new user account enter the user name access level and password then click Apply To change the password for a specific user enter the user name and new password confirm the password by entering it again then click Apply User Accounts Account List New Account User Name mike lt lt Add Access Level Normal 7 Remove Password R Confirm Password admin Privileged guest Normal Change Password lUser Name AAA New Password as Confirm Password Change Figure 3 30 Configuring the Logon Password CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 1 e administrator then specify the password Console config username bob access level 15 4 34 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 3 60 Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS or TACACS protocols USER AUTHENTICATION Remote al A y Authentication a hats tim E Dial in User Web console Service RADIUS aame and Terminal pa pa Patio AAAA 1 Client attempts manag
156. 9 198 102 Console config std acl end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console configure Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A2 in Console config if end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console This shows how to create an extended ACL with an egress mask to drop packets leaving network 171 69 198 0 when the Layer 4 source port is 23 Console config access list ip extended A3 Console config ext acl deny host 171 69 198 5 any Console config ext acl deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny host 171 69 198 5 any deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config Console config access list ip mask precedence out Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console config ip mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 15 Console config if ip access group A3 out Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 deny host 171 69 198 5 any IP egress mask ACL mask 255 255 255 0 any so
157. 95 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE radius server port This command sets the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server port port_number no radius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server port 181 Console config radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server key key_string no radius server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 96 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Example Console config radius server key green Console config radius server retransmit This command sets the number of retries Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no radius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config radius server timeout This command sets the interval betwe
158. AN interface Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address ip address netmask bootp dhcp no ip address ip address IP address e netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP e dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP Default Setting DHCP Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program Ifyou select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address default gateway and subnet mask e Youcan start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart command or by rebooting the switch Note Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address the default is VLAN 1 This defines the management VLAN the only VLAN through which you can gain management 4 288 IP INTEREACE COMMANDS
159. ANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 65 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 3 147 with the same set of instances and the same instance SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree To use multiple spanning trees 1 Set the spanning tree type to MSTP STA Configuration page 3 144 2 Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI MSTP VLAN Configuration Note All VLANs are automatically added to the IST Instance 0 To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings Command Attributes e MST Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree Default 0 e Priority The priority of a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default 32768 VLANs in MST Instance VLANs assigned this instance e MST ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 WLAN ID VLAN to assign to this selected
160. Admin State Oper State Synchronization Synchronization Admin State Aggregation Oper State Aggregation Admin State Timeout 4 Long Oper State Timeout H Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity Figure 3 55 LACP Port Internal Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 201 Port channel 1 Oper Key 3 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 2 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Console 3 120 PORT CONFIGURATION Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side of a link aggregation Table 3 9 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s p
161. Authorized yes 1 26 enabled Single Host Auto yes Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 2 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize Console 4 113 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Access Control List Commands Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addtesses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit tules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny tules the packet is accepted There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode STD ACL filters packets based on the source IP address e Extended IP ACL mode EXT ACL filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol
162. BIx Operation_Code Y 3101732 e vao071 Operation_Code N 3421124 Figure 3 12 Selecting the Startup Configuration Settings 3 27 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch Console copy tftp startup config 4 84 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console reload To select another configuration file as the start up configuration use the boot system command and then restart the switch Console config Console config boot system config startup new 4 90 Console config exit Console reload 4 29 Console Port Settings 3 28 You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch s serial console port Management access through the console port is controlled by various parameters including a password timeouts and basic communication settings These parameters can be configured via the Web or CLI interface Command Attributes Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 0
163. C 4 100 port tacacs server key Sets the TACACS encryption key GC 4 100 show tacacs server Shows the current TACACS settings GC 4 101 tacacs server host This command specifies the TACACS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server host host_ip_address no tacacs server host host_ip_address IP address of a TACACS server Default Setting 10 11 12 13 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server host 192 168 1 25 Console config 4 99 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE tacacs server port This command specifies the TACACS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server port port_number no tacacs server port port_number TACACS server TCP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 49 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server port 181 Console config tacacs server key This command sets the TACACS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server key key_string no tacacs server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 100 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Example Console config tacacs ser
164. C address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Id The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator 3 83 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Select Security 802 1X Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics 802 1X Statistics Query Rx EXPOL Start O Rx EAP LenError 0 Rx EAPOL Logoff O Rx Last EAPOLVer 0 Rx EAPOL Invalid O Rx Last EAPOLSre 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rx EAPOL Total _ S TxEAPOL Total 1 Rx EAP Respild O Tx EAP Reg ld 0 Rx EAP Resp Oth O Tx EAP Reg Oth 0 Refresh CLI This example displays the 802 1X statistics for port 4 Figure 3 39 802 1X Port Statistics Eth 1 4 Rx EXPOL EAPOL EAPOL Start Logoff Invalid 2 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc 1 00 00 E8 98 73 21 Tx EAPOL EAP EAP Total Req Id Req Oth 2017 1005 0 Console Console show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1 4 EAPOL EAP Total 1007 672 4 110 EAP EAP Resp Id Resp Oth LenError 0 0 3 84 USER AUTHENTICATION Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that ar
165. CL rules are entered e First create the required ACLs and the ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Specifying the Mask Type Use the ACL Mask Configuration page to edit the mask for the Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL 3 95 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 96 Web Click Security ACL Mask Configuration Click Edit for one of the basic mask types to open the configuration page ACL Mask Configuration Mask Type Mask Action Edit IP lingress Edit IP Egress Edit MAC Ingress Edit MAC Egress Edit Figure 3 45 Selecting ACL Mask Types CLI This example creates an IP ingress mask and then adds two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console config access list ip mask precedence in 4 123 Console config ip mask acl mask host any 4 124 Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl Configuring an IP ACL Mask This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Command Usage Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly fi
166. Console config show bridge ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 4 168 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 4 16 for a description of the displayed items Example Console show bridge ext Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console 4 255 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport gvrp This command enables GVRP for a port Use the no form to disable it Syntax no switchport gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config if show gvrp configuration This command shows if GVRP is enabled Syntax show gvrp configuration 1 1erface interface ethernet wnit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows both global and interface specific configuration Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show gvrp conf
167. Current Identifier The integer 0 255 used by the Authenticator to identify the current authentication session e Authenticator State Machine State Current state including initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorized force_unauthorized Reauth Count Number of times connecting state is re entered Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier packet received from the Authentication Server Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize reauthenticate 4 112 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Example Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is enabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 26 reauth enabled Enable reauth period 3600 quiet period 60 tx period 30 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 2 Status Authorized Operation mode Multi Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 e0 29 94 34 65 Current Identifier 3 Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 25 disabled Single Host Force
168. DE 1 Permanent Eth 1 1 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 2 Learned Console Changing the Aging Time You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes e Aging Status Enables disables the aging function 3 137 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 seconds Web Click Address Table Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Status F Enabled Aging Time 10 1000000 400 seconds Figure 3 64 Address Aging CLI This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 400 4 209 Console config Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 138 The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions STA Spanning Tree Algorithm IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1 w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
169. DUs Sent 21 LACPDUs Received 21 Marker Sent 0 Marker Received 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 Console 4 201 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of a link aggregation Table 3 8 LACP Internal Configuration Information Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU Internal information LACP System LACP system priority assigned to this port channel Priority LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group 3 118 PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 8 LACP Internal Configuration Information Continued Field Description Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state arameters Oper State P Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes o
170. Deletes a file or code image PE 4 87 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4 88 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4 89 boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the GC 4 90 system This command moves upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection Syntax copy file file running config startup config tftp unit copy running config file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config https certificate public key copy unit file e file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration e startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server FLasH FiLE COMMANDS https certificate Keyword that allows you to copy the HTTPS secure site certificate e public key Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP server See Secure Shell Commands on page 4 44 e
171. Disabled SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm control to 64 packets per second See the switchport broadcast command on page 181 The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show system command page 4 80 Example Console config jumbo frame Console config 4 83 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Flash File Commands copy 4 84 These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files Table 4 25 Flash File Commands Command Function Mode Page copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration PE 4 84 to or from flash memory or a TFTP server delete
172. Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 GVRP status Disabled Allowed VLAN 1 u Forbidden VLAN Console 4 186 INTEREACE COMMANDS Table 4 46 show interfaces switchport display description Field Description Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 181 LACP status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 4 194 Ingress Egress rate limit Shows if rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 191 VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 4 240 Ingress rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 4 242 Acceptable frame type Native VLAN Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only page 4 241 Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 4 243 Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames page 4 259 GVRP status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled page 4 256 Allowed VLAN Forbidden VLAN Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 4 244 Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP page 4 245 4 187
173. Displays the administrative and NE 4 186 switchport operational status of an interface PE show vlan This command shows VLAN information Syntax show vlan id v an id name vlan name id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name e vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters Default Setting Shows all VLANs Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 246 VLAN COMMANDS Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 VLAN ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 8 s S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Console Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This section describes commands used to configure private VIANs Table 4 60 Private VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page pvlan Enables and configured private GC 4 247 VLANS show pvlan Displays the configured private PE 4 248 VLANS pvlan This command enables or configures a private VLAN Use
174. E 4 88 WHICHDOO ES ad AGA eases ibid 4 89 Poot syste x deb ee ya a E a deat ayers sang ae Ba eee 4 90 Authentication Commands s lee teaa ie a cence cence 4 91 Authentication Sequence 1 1 6 cece eee 4 91 authentication login 6 eee eee 4 92 authentication enable ooo oooooomomomomm 4 93 RADIUS Cheney iy A gees ead inate A ent he oe 4 94 radius server host vii eee A ne 4 95 tadius servet Port sasis minati sam cece eee ee 4 96 tadius S tvet KEY si ann gece wee a aoe ented Beale 4 96 radius server retransmit 2 eee eee 4 97 radius setver timeout 0 cece eee eee eee 4 97 show tadius server cece cece eee eee eens 4 98 TACACS E Cl A a 4 98 tacacs server Ost a ade ud 4 99 tacacs setverport smia a ore naea A i dees 4 100 tacacs server key oann it a an dado db 4 100 show tacacs Servet oooooooooocroror eens 4 101 Port Security Commands 00 e cee cee eee ee 4 101 port security od ta Rah tol aad a 4 102 802 1X Port Authentication 0 0 cece eee 4 104 dotlx system auth control 00 eee eee eee 4 105 CONTENTS dotluid taltarna a A ta 4 105 dotix max teg en p a ga da da i aE e 4 106 dotlx port control oooooocccocooooococcooooooo 4 106 dotlx operation mode 6 cece eee ee o 4 107 dotlx re authenticate 2 6 eee eee 4 108 dotlx re authentication 0 6 eee eee 4 108 dotlx timeout quiet period o ooooooooocccccco ooo 4 109 dot1x timeout re authpe
175. E ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 Configuration Settings for MSTP Max Instance Numbers The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this switch can be assigned Default 65 e Configuration Digest An MD5 signature key that contains the VLAN ID to MST ID mapping table In other words this key is a mapping of all VLANs to the CIST Region Revision The revision for this MSTI Range 0 65535 Default 0 Region Name The name for this MSTI Maximum length 32 characters Max Hop Count The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before a BPDU is discarded Range 1 40 Default 20 7 The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region 3 147 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 148 Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configuration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanning Tree State F Enabled Spanning Tree Type RSTP y Priority 0 61440 in steps of 4096 32768 When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 forward delay 1 Hello Time 1 10 2 seconds Maximum Age 6 40 20 seconds G 1 Forward Delay 4 30 15 seconds RSTP Configuration Path Cost Met
176. E INTERFACE Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used This switch provides eight priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port The default priority for all ingress ports is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 queue bandwidth This command assigns weighted round robin WRR weights to the eight class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default wei
177. Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy Internal MAC Receive A count of frames for which reception on a particular Errors interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 10 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Received Frames The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets
178. From U S A and Canada 24 hours a day 7 days a week 800 SMC 4 YOU Phn 949 679 8000 Fax 949 679 1481 From Europe Contact details can be found on www smc europe com or www smc com INTERNET E mail addresses techsupportOsmc com european techsupport smc europe com Driver updates http www smc com index cfm action tech_support_drivers_downloads World Wide Web http www smc com http www smc europe com FOR LITERATURE OR ADVERTISING RESPONSE CALL U S A and Canada Spain UK France Italy Benelux Central Europe Nordic Eastern Europe Sub Saharian Africa North West Africa CIS PRC Taiwan Asia Pacific Korea Japan Australia India 800 SMC 4 YOU 34 91 352 00 40 44 0 1932 866553 33 0 41 38 32 32 39 0 335 5708602 31 33 455 72 88 49 0 89 92861 0 46 0 868 70700 34 93 477 4920 216 712 36616 34 93 477 4920 7 095 7893573 86 10 6235 4958 886 2 8797 8006 65 238 6556 82 2 553 0860 81 45 224 2332 61 2 8875 7887 91 22 8204437 Fax 949 679 1481 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Fax 44 0 118 974 8701 Fax 33 0 41 38 01 58 Fax 39 02 739 14 17 Fax 31 33 455 73 30 Fax 49 0 89 92861 230 Fax 46 0 887 62 62 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Fax 216 71751415 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Fax 7 095 789 35 73 Fax 86 10 6235 4962 Fax 886 2 8797 6288 Fax 65 238 6466 Fax 82 2 553 7202 Fax 81 45 224 2331 Fax 61 2 8875 7777 Fax 91 22 8204443 If you are
179. GMRP Disabled Console 3 17 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Setting the Switch s IP Address This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management 3 18 access over the network The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings IP address 0 0 0 0 and netmask 255 0 0 0 to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Command Attributes Management VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4093 no leading zeroes By default all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1 However the management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN as long as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configuration Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch
180. ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping host size size count couni host IP address or IP alias of the host size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 default 32 The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the switch adds header information count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 default 5 Default Setting This command has no default for the host Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached Following are some results of the ping command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging IP INTERFACE COMMANDS Example Console ping 10 1 0 9 Type ESC to abort PING to 10 1 0 9 by 5 32 byte payload ICMP packets timeout is 5 seconds response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 0 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 0 packets lost 0 Appr
181. IEEE 802 1s SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STA compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops sx Designated SN J Root Pa NS 1 J A el x OA X A Designated x a ay we y Designated Port rN lan yo Q _ Bridge Nh x Nes ae X Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestabli
182. Interval 60 125 125 IGMP Report Delay 5 25 10 IGMP Query Timeout 300 500 IGMP Version 1 2 IGMP Status F Enabled Act as IGMP Querier I Enabled IGMP Query Count 2 10 2 seconds seconds seconds Figure 3 93 IGMP Configuration CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console config Hip Console config Hip Console config Hip Console config Hip Console config Hip Console config Hip Console config Hip Service status Querier status Query count Query interval Console igmp igmp igmp igmp igmp igmp igmp Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping snooping snooping querier snooping query count 10 snooping query interval 100 snooping query max response time 20 snooping router port time 300 snooping version 2 Enabled Enabled 10 100 sec Query max response time 20 sec Router port expire time 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 4 277 4 281 4 281 4 282 4 283 4 284 4 278 4 279 3 204 MULTICAST FILTERING Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interfac
183. LAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 00 01 30 2001 01 01 Unit 1 Port 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Console SMTP Alert Commands These commands configure SMTP event handling and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients Table 4 21 SMTP Alert Commands Command Function Mode Page ogging sendmail host Specifies SMTP servers that will be sent GC 4 66 alert messages ogging sendmail Sets the severity threshold used to trigger GC 4 67 evel alert messages ogging sendmail Sets the email address used for From GC 4 67 source email field of alert messages ogging sendmail Specifies the email recipients of alert GC 4 68 destination email messages ogging sendmail Enables SMTP event handling GC 4 69 show logging Displays SMTP event handler settings NE 4 69 sendmail PE 4 65 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE logging sendmail host This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages Use the no form to remove an SMTP server Syntax no logging sendmail host 7p_address ip_address YP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing However you must enter a separate
184. N Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the switch except for the uplink ports Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports on the switch and with any designated downlink ports 3 181 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Link Status Mark the ports that will serve as uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN then click Apply Private VLAN Link Status Port Uplink Downlink None Trunk Member 1 Cc C ce 2 C O a 3 a c G 4 ol C O 5 C eC C E C e c 7 O G Figure 3 80 Private VLAN Link Status CLI This configures ports 3 and 4 as uplinks and ports 5 and 6 as downlinks Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 3 down link ethernet 1 5 4 247 Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 3 down link ethernet 1 6 Console config end Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 3 Down link port Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Console Configuring Protocol Based VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility 3 182 VLAN CONFIGU
185. Netscape Navigator version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5 0 and higher The switch s Web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network The switch s management agent also supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as SMC EliteView 2 1 INITIAL CONFIGURATION The switch s Web interface CLI configuration program and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions Set user names and passwords Set an IP interface for the switch Configure SNMP parameters Enable disable any port Set the speed duplex mode for any port Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates Control port access through IEEE 802 1X security or static address filtering Filter packets using Access Control Lists ACLs Configure up to 255 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration Configure IGMP multicast filtering Upload and download system firmware via TFTP Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP Configure Spanning Tree parameters Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing Configure up to 6 static or LACP trunks per switch up to 32 per stack from 2 to
186. None E Cemwea B 4 None MEnabled Doo 5 Trap and Shutdown z F Enabled 20 e None El F Enabled E i j 7 Nowe Sd F Enabled 8 None Enabled bo E Figure 3 35 Port Security CLI This example sets the command mode to Port 5 sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port and then enables port security for the switch Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Hport security action trap and shutdown 4 102 Console config if Htport security max mac count 20 4 102 Console config if Hport security Console config 1f Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication 3 76 Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1X dot1x standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch USER AUTHENTICATION ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network This switch uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to exchange authentication proto
187. OTELOG level type Debugging messages REMOTELOG server IP address 1 2 3 4 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 Console 4 63 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 20 show logging trap display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command REMOTELOG Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging status trap command REMOTELOG The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as facility type specified in the logging facility command REMOTELOG The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote level type server as specified in the logging trap command REMOTELOG The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging server IP address host command Related Commands show logging sendmail 4 69 show log This command displays the log messages stored in local memory Syntax show log flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 64 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example The following example shows the event message stored in RAM Console show log ram 1 00 01 30 2001 01 01 V
188. P List lt lt Add Host IP Address Remove Figure 3 16 Remote Logs CLI Enter the syslog server host IP address choose the facility type and set the logging trap Console config logging host 10 1 0 9 4 59 Console config logging facility 23 4 60 Console config logging trap 4 4 61 Console config logging trap Console config exit Console show logging trap 4 62 Syslog logging Enabled REMOTELOG status Disabled REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Warning conditions REMOTELOG server ip address 10 1 0 9 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 Console 3 36 BASIC CONFIGURATION Displaying Log Messages Use the Logs page to scroll through the logged system and event messages The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory RAM i e memory flushed on power reset and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory Web Click System Log Logs Logs Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 funcions 1 error number 1 Information STA topology change notificetion Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number 1 Information STA topology change notification Log Messages Level 6 Modules functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 Port 43 link up notification Log Messages Le
189. Precedence or DSCP Priority of a frame matching the defined rule i e also called packet marking show marking Displays the current configuration for PE 4 132 access list ip This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list ip standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address e extended Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address and other more specific criteria acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters 4 117 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An egress ACL must contain all deny rules When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one tule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list ip standard david Console config std acl Related Commands permit deny 4 118 ip access group 4 128 show ip access list 4 122 permit deny Standard ACL This command adds a rule t
190. Precedence COS Eth 1 1 o 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 2 Eth 1 1 3 3 Eth 1 1 4 4 Eth 1 1 505 Eth 1 1 6 6 Eth 1 1 7 7 Console Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP replaces the ToS bits but it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant ToS enabled devices will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 3 14 Mapping DSCP Priority IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 0 8 1 10 12 14 16 2 3 195 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Table 3 14 Mapping DSCP Priority Continued IP DSCP Value CoS Value 18 20 22 24 3 26 28 30 32 34 36 4 38 40 42 5 48 6 46 56 7 Command Attributes DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces Web Cl
191. RATION To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets Command Usage To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 3 171 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page Configuring Protocol Groups Create a protocol group for one or mote protocols Command Attributes Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Frame Type Frame type used by this protocol Options Ethernet RFC_1042 LLC_other Protocol Type The only option for the LLC_other frame type is IPX_raw The options for all other frames types include IP ARP RARP 3 183 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 184 Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Configuration Enter a protocol group ID frame type and protocol type then click Apply Protocol
192. TCH 3 20 Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the switch to be dynamically configured by these services Web Click System IP Configuration Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new address Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset IP Configuration Management VLAN fi IP Address Mode DHCP y IP Address 192168154 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 253 MAC Address 00 30 F1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Figure 3 7 DHCP IP Configuration Note If you lose your management connection use a console connection and enter show ip interface to determine the new switch address BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP address mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart command Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 174 Console config if ip address dhcp 4 288 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 4 289 Console show ip interface 4 291 IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode dhcp Console Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the addres
193. TTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port Ifyou enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data 4 41 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x and Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later versions The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 4 13 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 e To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 66 Also refer to the copy command on page 4 84 Example Console config ip http secure server Console config Related Commands ip http secure port 4 42
194. TigerStack 106 Gigabit Ethernet Switch CAR A A a A A a a a A A G 24 48 auto MDI MDI X 10 100 1000BASE T ports 4 ports shared with 4 SFP transceiver slots Non blocking switching architecture Support for a redundant power unit Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and MSTP Up to 32 LACP or static 8 port trunks Layer 2 3 4 CoS support through eight priority queues Layer 3 4 traffic priority with IP Precedence and IP DSCP Full support for VLANs with GVRP IGMP multicast filtering and snooping Support for jumbo frames up to 9 KB Manageable via console Web and SNMP RMON SMC Seen A Networks SMC amp 748M SMC Networks TigerStack 10G Management Guide From SMC s Tiger line of feature rich workgroup LAN solutions SMC Networks 38 Tesla October 2004 Irvine CA 92618 Phone 949 679 8000 Pub 1502000490004 Information furnished by SMC Networks Inc SMC is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use No license is granted by implication or oth erwise under any patent or patent rights of SMC SMC reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice Copyright 2004 by SMC Networks Inc 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 All rights reserved Trademarks SMC is a registered trademark and EZ Switch TigerStack and TigerSwitch are trademarks of
195. Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Range 1 32 Default Setting The current port will be added to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard Use no channel group to remove a port group from a trunk e Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch Example The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11 Console Console Console Console config interface port channel 1 config if exit config interface ethernet 1 11 config if lacp This command enables 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the current interface Use the no form to disable it Syntax no lacp Default Setting Disabled 4 194 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID e Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically Ifmore than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports
196. VLAN Configuration Current New Group 1 Ethernet 08 00 Protocol G ID 1 2147483647 i Group 1 Ethernet 08 06 Add indie des Genta y Frame Type Ethernet X Remove Protocol Type Ip S Figure 3 81 Protocol VLAN Configuration CLI The following creates protocol group 1 and then specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip 4 250 Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config Mapping Protocols to VLANs Map a protocol group to a VLAN for each interface that will participate in the group Command Usage When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces using this configuration screen If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands such as VLAN Static Table page 3 173 or VLAN Static Membership page 3 175 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN e When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner Ifthe frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN VLAN CONFIGURATION If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forward
197. a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can gain access The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c If a match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client 4 47 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys ip ssh server 4 48 This command enables the Secure Shell SSH server on this switch Use the no form to disable this service Syntax no ip ssh server Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions The
198. acceptable frame type 3 177 4 241 Access Control List See ACL ACL Extended IP 3 88 4 114 4 116 4 120 MAC 3 88 4 114 4 133 4 134 4 137 Standard IP 3 88 4 114 4 116 4 118 address table 3 134 4 206 aging time 3 137 4 210 B BOOTP 3 20 4 288 BPDU 3 139 broadcast storm threshold 3 123 4 181 C Class of Service See CoS CLI showing commands 4 5 command line interface See CLI community string 2 13 3 47 4 149 configuration settings saving or restoring 3 25 4 84 console port required connections 2 2 INDEX CoS configuring 3 186 4 259 DSCP 3 195 3 199 4 271 IP port priority 3 197 4 268 IP precedence 3 193 4 269 layer 3 4 priorities 3 192 4 267 queue mapping 3 188 4 263 queue mode 3 190 4 260 traffic class weights 3 191 4 262 D default gateway configuration 3 19 4 290 default priority ingress port 3 186 4 261 default settings system 1 7 DHCP 3 20 4 288 client 3 18 4 163 dynamic configuration 2 11 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP DNS default domain name 3 210 4 166 displaying the cache 3 215 domain name list 3 210 4 164 enabling lookup 3 210 4 169 name server list 3 210 4 168 static entries 3 213 Domain Name Service See DNS downloading software 3 23 4 84 DSCP enabling 3 193 4 271 mapping priorities 3 195 3 199 4 272 dynamic addresses displaying 3 136 4 208 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP Index 1 INDEX E edge port STA 3 152 3 155
199. ache CLI This example displays all the resource records learned from the designated name servers Console show dns cache 4 171 NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN 0 4 CNAME 207 46 134 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 1 4 CNAME 207 46 134 190 51 www microsoft akadns net 2 4 CNAME 207 46 134 155 51 www microsoft akadns net 3 4 CNAME 207 46 249 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 4 4 CNAME 207 46 249 27 51 www microsoft akadns net 5 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 4 51 www microsoft com 6 4 CNAME 207 46 68 27 71964 msn com tw 7 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 6 71964 www msn com tw 8 4 CNAME 65 54 131 192 605 passportimages com 9 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 8 605 www passportimages com 10 4 CNAME 165 193 72 190 87 global msads net Console 3 216 CHAPTER 4 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of
200. age out dynamically learned forwarding information Example Console config mac address table aging time 100 Console config 4 209 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show mac address table aging time This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 300 sec Spanning Tree Commands This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface Table 4 55 Spanning Tree Commands transmission limit RSTP MSTP Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4 212 spanning tree mode Configures STP RSTP or MSTP mode GC 4 213 spanning tree Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 214 forward time forward time spanning tree hello time Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 215 hello time spanning tree max age Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 216 maximum age spanning tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 217 priority spanning tree Configures the path cost method for GC 4 217 path cost method RSTP MSTP spanning tree Configures the transmission limit for GC 4 218 4 210 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Table 4 55 Spanning Tree Commands Con
201. al engineid string String identifying the engine ID Range 1 26 hexadecimal characters Default Setting A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on this switch This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engine ID In other words the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 22 zeroes 4 154 SNMP COMMANDS e A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users page 4 161 Example Console config snmp server engine id local 12345 Console config show snmp engine id This command shows the SNMP engine ID Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the default engine ID Console show snmp engine id Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Console Table 4 40 show snmp engine id display description Field Description Local SNMP String identifying
202. al Exec Level RADIUS Authentication Disabled TACACS Authentication Disabled 802 1X Port Authentication Disabled HTTPS Enabled SSH Disabled Port Security Disabled IP Filtering Disabled Web Management HTTP Server Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Port Number 443 SNMP Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Authentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled SNMP v3 View defaultview Group public read only private read write 1 8 SYSTEM DEFAULTS Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Port Admin Status Enabled Configuration Auto negotiation Enabled Flow Conttol Disabled Rate Limiting Input and output limits Disabled Port Trunking Static Trunks None LACP all ports Disabled Broadcast Storm Status Enabled all ports Protection Broadcast Limit Rate 500 packets per second Spanning Tree Status Enabled RSTP Protocol Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 1w Fast Forwarding Edge Port Disabled Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Disabled Switchport Mode Egress Hybrid tagged untagged Mode frames GVRP global Disabled GVRP port interface Disabled Traffic Ingress Port Priority 0 Prioritization Weighted Round Robin Queue 012 34
203. ame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1s An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP which provides independent spanning trees for VLAN groups IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members Glossary 3 GLOSSARY IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can re
204. and Ethernet type ACL Information Display ACLs and associated rules shows ACLs 4 144 assigned to each port IP ACLs Table 4 34 IP ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters GC 4 117 configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs permit deny Filters packets matching a specified STD ACL 4 118 source IP address permit deny Filters packets meeting the specified EXT ACL 4 120 criteria including source and destination IP address TCP UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code show ip access list Displays the rules for configured IP PE 4 122 ACLs 4 116 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Table 4 34 IP ACL Commands Continued packet marking Command Function Mode Page access list ip Changes to the IP Mask mode used to GC 4 123 mask precedence configure access control masks mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL IP Mask 4 124 rules show access list ip Shows the ingress or egress rule masks PE 4 127 mask precedence for IP ACLs ip access group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4 128 show ip Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4 128 access gtoup map access list ip Sets the CoS value and corresponding IC 4 129 output queue for packets matching an ACL rule show map Shows CoS value mapped to an access PE 4 130 access list ip list for an interface match access list ip Changes the 802 1p priority IP IC 4 131
205. anning Tree MSTP Port Information or Trunk Information Select the required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values MSTP Port Information MST Instance ID 0 y STA Forward Designated Designated Designated Oper Oper Trunk Port Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Link Type Edge Port Port Role Member 1 Forwarding 1 200000 82768 0 0030F1552000 128 24 ste Disabled Root Point to 2 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000E9313131 128 2 ani Enabled Disabled 3 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000E9313131 128 3 seg Enabled Disabled 4 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000E9313131 128 4 coms Enabled Disabled 5 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000E9313131 128 5 Ponto Enabled Disabled oint xl Figure 3 70 MSTP Port Information 3 160 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This displays STA settings for instance 0 followed by settings for each port The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST page 3 140 the settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree Console show spanning tree mst 0 4 233 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enabled Instance 0 Vlans configuration 1 4093 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15
206. anning tree hello time This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time ve no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config 4 215 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree max age 4 216 This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration messag
207. apping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping CoS Values to ACLs Use the ACL CoS Mapping page to set the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule as shown in the following table Note that the specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues see page 3 188 Table 3 15 Egress Queue Priority Mapping Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the tule Command Attributes Port Port identifier Name Name of ACL e Type Type of ACL IP or MAC e CoS Priority CoS value used for packets matching an IP ACL rule Range 0 7 For information on configuring ACLs see page 3 87 3 199 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority ACL CoS Priority Enable mapping for any port select an ACL from the scroll down list then click Apply ACL CoS Priority ACL CoS Priority Configure Port Name Type CoS Priority 0 7 marea Adal ACL CoS Priority Mapping Port Name Type CoS Priority 1 bill IP 0 Remove Figure 3 92 ACL CoS Priority CLI This e
208. are not used e 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password e password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default is level 15 The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 4 26 The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Related Commands enable 4 26 authentication enable 4 93 IP Filter Commands Table 4 11 IP Filter Commands Command Function Mode Page management Configures IP addresses that are allowed GC 4 37 management access show management Displays the switch to be monitored or PE 4 38 configured from a browser management This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Use the no form to restore the default
209. aster media and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media Path cost takes precedence over interface priority Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst port priority 4 231 4 230 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree mst port priority This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst nstance_id port priority priority no spanning tree mst nstance_id port priority instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes e priority Priority for an interface Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple spanning tree If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same the interface with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 Console config
210. at is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device Configuration Changes The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree This is always 0 for the CIST VLANs configuration VLANs assigned to the CIST Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device 3 141 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 142 Root Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device
211. at only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 3 5 seconds of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STA standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STA but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP compliant mode if they detect STA protocol messages from attached devices Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s This protocol is a direct extension of RSTP It can provide an independent spanning tree for different VLANs It simplifies network management provides for even faster convergence than RSTP by limiting the size of each region and 1 5 INTRODUCTION 1 6 prevents VLAN members from being segmented from the rest of the group as sometimes occurs with IEEE 802 1D STA Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 255 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP or ports can be manually ass
212. ation Configures logon access using local or remote authentication also configures port security and IEEE 802 1X port access control 4 91 Access Control List Provides filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type 4 114 SNMP Activates authentication failure traps configures community access strings and trap managers also configures IP address filtering 4 146 Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports aggregated links and VLANs 4 173 Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data passing through or the performance of the monitored port 4 188 Rate Limiting Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4 190 Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk configures Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks 4 192 4 11 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 12 Table 4 4 Command Group Index Continued Bridge Extension VLAN learning shows the configuration for the bridge extension MIB Command Group Description Page Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified 4 206 addresses displays current entries clears the table or sets the aging time Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree setting
213. ation Name Port admin status Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Flow control status Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Created by Lacp Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Console Configuring LACP Parameters Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria e Ports must have the same LACP System Priority e Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key However if the port channel Admin Key is set page 4 199 then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group 3 113 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 114 Note If the port channel admin key lacp admin key page 4 199 is not set through the CLI when a channel group is formed Le it has a null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group lacp admin key as described in this section and on page 4 198 Command Attributes Set Port Actor This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link i e the ports on this switch Port Port number Range 1 24 48 System Priority LACP system priority is used to determ
214. authentication on specific ports 4 104 using 802 1X Authentication Sequence Table 4 28 Authentication Sequence Command Function Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method GC 4 92 and precedence authentication enable Defines the authentication method and GC 4 93 precedence for command mode change 4 91 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE authentication login 4 92 This command defines the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius tacacs no authentication login e local Use local password e radius Use RADIUS server password tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter
215. ave obtained these place them on your TFTP server and use the following command at the switch s command line interface to replace the default unrecognized certificate with an authorized one Console copy tftp https certificate 4 84 TFTP server ip address lt server ip address gt Source certificate file name lt certificate file name gt Source private file name lt private key file name gt Private password lt password for private key gt Note The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated To reset the switch type Console reload Configuring the Secure Shell The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as r ogin remote login rsh remote shell and rep remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures t
216. be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN e New Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not added to the VLAN tag e WLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 no leading zeroes VLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters 3 171 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 172 Status Web Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets State CLI Enables or disables the specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New 1 DetaultVian Enabled VLAN ID 1 4093 2 lt lt Add y lt PS VLAN Name R amp D Status F Enabled Figure 3 75 Creating Virtual LANs VLAN CONFIGURATION CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database 4 236 Console config vlan vlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active 4 237 Console config vlan end
217. ble to retrieve MIB objects private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config Hsnmp server community alpha rw Console config 4 149 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE snmp server contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax snmp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server contact Paul Console config Related Commands snmp server location 4 150 snmp server location This command sets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location ext no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None 4 150 SNMP COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config Hsnmp server location WC 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server contact 4 150 snmp server host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp se
218. cally detect the baud rate configured on the attached terminal and adjust the speed accordingly LINE COMMANDS Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line stopbits This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax stopbits 1 2 e 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line stopbits 2 Console config line disconnect Use this command to terminate an SSH Telnet or console connection Syntax disconnect session id session id The session identifier for an SSH Telnet or console connection Range 0 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 23 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage Specifying session identifier 0 will disconnect the console connection Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection Example Console disconnect 1 Console Related Commands show ssh 4 54 show users 4 81 show line This command displays the terminal line s parameters Syntax show line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting Shows all lines Comma
219. can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP This switch supports up to six trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex Table 4 49 Link Aggregation Commands Command Function Mode Page Manual Configuration Commands interface port channel Configures a trunk and GC 4 174 enters interface configuration mode for the trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk IC Ethernet 4 194 Dynamic Configuration Commands lacp Configures LACP for the IC Ethernet 4 194 current interface lacp system priority Configures a port s LACP IC Ethernet 4 197 system priority lacp admin key Configures a port s IC Ethernet 4 198 administration key lacp admin key Configures a port channel s IC Port Channel 4 199 administration key lacp port priority Configures a port s LACP IC Ethernet 4 200 port priority Trunk Status Display Commands show interfaces status Shows trunk information NE PE 4 183 port channel show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4 201 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Guidelines for Creating Trunks General Guidelines Fin
220. ccess list mac 4 134 14 For all bitmasks 1 means care and 0 means ignore 4 136 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS show mac access list This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs Syntax show mac access list ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access list MAC access list jerry permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 135 mac access group 4 141 access list mac mask precedence This command accesses MAC Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified MAC ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration 4 137 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a pack
221. ch as a faulty port or 3 127 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 128 unusually heavy loading RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port All values displayed have been accumulated since the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as SMC EliteView Table 3 10 Port Statistics Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Received Multicast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Received Broadcast The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to Packets a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer Received Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen Packets to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Received Unknown T
222. ch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures the multicast filters accordingly MULTICAST FILTERING IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one routet switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the setvice requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Command Attributes IGMP Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled Act as IGMP Querier When enabled
223. classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Displaying Current VLANs The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging 8 Web Only 3 169 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 170 Command Attributes Web VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 UpTime at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry Egress Ports Shows all the VLAN port members Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Current Table Select any ID from the scroll down list VLAN Current Table VLAN ID fa Up Time at Creation 0 dO hO minOs Status Permanent Egress Ports Uniti Port Unit Port2 Unitl Port3 Uniti Por4 Unitl PortS Unitl Port Unitl Port Unit Pong gt Untagged Ports Unit Port a Unit Port2 Uniti Port3 Unit Porta Unit Port Uniti Port6 Unit Port Uniti Pong zi Figure 3 74 VLAN Current Table Command Attributes CLI VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 no leading zeroes Type Shows h
224. code 2 18 4 121 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config ext acl Related Commands access list ip 4 117 show ip access list This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs Syntax show ip access list standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies a standard IP ACL e extended Specifies an extended IP ACL acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 122 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Example Console show ip access list standard IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255 Console
225. col messages with the client and a remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access rights When a client i e Supplicant connects to a switch port the switch i e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides its identity such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The client can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The current version of the firmware supports only the MD5 authentication method The client responds E to the appropriate F method with its 802 1X credentials such as a client BEBE BEBES password or 1 Client attempts to access a switch port certificate The 2 Switch sends client an identity request 3 Client sends back identity information RADIUS server RADIUS P A ea 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server Server 5 Authentication server challenges client verifies the client 6 Client responds with proper credentials 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client access to this port credentials and responds with an accept or r
226. command Example Console ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 51 ip ssh save host key 4 53 no ip ssh server 4 48 ip ssh save host key This command saves the host key from RAM to flash memory Syntax ip ssh save host key dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type Default Setting Saves both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console ip ssh save host key dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 51 4 53 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show ip ssh This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ssh SSH Enabled version 1 99 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh This command displays the current SSH server connections Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ssh Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console Table 4 16 show ssh display description Field Description Session The session number Range 0 3 Version The Secure Shell version number State The authentication negotiation state Values Negotiation Started Authentication Started Session Started
227. consisting of the bridge priority and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message 3 140 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states 1 e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port on this switch th
228. cted to a network interconnection device The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero You must configure a maximum address count from 1 1024 for the port to allow access If a port is disabled shut down due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled from the Port Port Configuration page page 3 105 Command Attributes Port Port number Name Descriptive text page 4 174 Action Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected None No action should be taken This is the default Trap Send an SNMP trap message Shutdown Disable the port Trap and Shutdown Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port Security Status Enables or disables port security on the port Default Disabled Max MAC Count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 Trunk Trunk number if port is a member page 3 109 and 3 111 3 75 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Security Port Security Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a port set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port and click Apply Port Security Configuration Port Name Action Security Status Max MAC Count 0 1024 Trunk 1 None El F Enabled Doo 2 Nome El Menabies P a
229. ctory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured e MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority 1 e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 3 162 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Admin MST Path Cost This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 e Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet
230. cursor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl N Enters the next command line in the history buffer Ctrl P Enters the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command 4 10 COMMAND GROUPS Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below Table 4 4 Command Group Index Command Group Description Page Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet including baud rate and console time out 4 13 General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode restarting the system or quitting the CLI 4 25 System Management Controls system logs system passwords user name browser management options and a variety of other system information 4 31 Flash File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4 84 Authentic
231. d GVRP Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members 4 246 Information and MAC addresses 4 235 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 56 VLAN Commands Continued Command Groups Function Page Configuring Private Configures private VLANs including uplink and 4 247 VLANs downlink ports Configuring Protocol Configures protocol based VLANs based on 4 247 VLANs frame type and protocol Editing VLAN Groups Table 4 57 Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add GC 4 236 change and delete VLANs vlan Configures a VLAN including VID VC 4 237 name and state vlan database 4 236 This command enters VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Use the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finishing configuration changes you can display the VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command e Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command vlan VLAN COMMANDS Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show
232. d Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use the show spanning tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree CST and for every interface in the tree Use the show spanning tree nterface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree CST Use the show spanning tree mst nstance_ d command to display the spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree MST e Fora description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 4 144 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 4 149 4 233 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enabled disabled enabled nstance 0 VLANs configuration 4093 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 5 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 5 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Current root port Current root cost 0000 Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec 21561 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method ong Admin status enabled Role
233. d limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram evel no logging history flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset e evel One of the levels listed below Messages sent include the selected level down to evel 0 Range 0 7 Table 4 18 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 debugging Debugging messages 6 informational Informational messages only 5 notifications Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 warnings Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 errors Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 alerts Immediate action needed 0 emergencies System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release Default Setting Flash errors level 3 0 RAM warnings level 7 0 4 58 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority 1 e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Console confi
234. d not be transmitted because of errors Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too shott error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode 3 129 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 130 Table 3 10 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test
235. ders this link to be ageregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 4 203 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Console show lacp 1 neighbors Channel group 1 neighbors Eth 1 1 Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 01 F4 78 AE CO Partner Admin Port Number 2 Partner Oper Port Number 2 4 204 Port Admin Priority Port Oper Priority Admin Key Oper Key Admin State Oper State 32768 32768 0 3 defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Table 4 52 show lacp neighbors display description Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partnet s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation
236. device After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters click Apply Aggregation Port Set Port Actor System Priority Admin Key Port Priority 065535 065535 065535 128 120 128 j a wjf nm 20 256 120 512 zi Figure 3 53 LACP Aggregation Port Tr ii 3 115 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 116 CLI The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1 6 Ports 1 4 are used as active members of the LAG ports 5 and 6 are set to backup mode Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 174 Console config if Htlacp actor system priority 3 4 197 Console config if Htlacp actor admin key 1204 198 Console config if Htlacp actor port priority 128 4 200 Console config 1f Htexit Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 6 Console config if Htlacp actor system priority 3 Console config if Htlacp actor admin key 120 Console config if Htlacp actor port priority 512 Console config if end Console sh lacp sysid 4 201 Channel Group System Priority System MAC Address 1 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 2 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 3 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 4 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 5 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 6 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 201 Channel group 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 120 Console Displaying LACP Port Counters You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages Coun
237. devices supporting SNMP contain software which runs locally on the device and is referred to as an agent A defined set of variables known as managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB that provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The switch includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 This agent continuously monitors the status of the switch hardware as well as the traffic passing through its ports A network management station can access this information using software such as SMC EliteView Access to the onboard agent from clients using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication Access to the switch using from clients using SNMPv3 provides additional security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree The SNMPv3 security structure consists of security models with each model having it s own security levels There are three security models defined SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 Users are assigned to groups that are defined by a secur
238. dge Port to improve the switch s response time to management commands issued through the web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 3 153 NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics The default user name and password for the administrator is admin Home Page When your web browser connects with the switch s web agent the home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics Unit jz Mode Active z B Unk upi Link Down SMC8748M SMC8724M Manager System Name Object ID 1 36 1 4 1 202 20 42 Location Contact System Up Time days 3 hours 8 minutes and 45 11 seconds Connect to textual user interface Send mail to technical suppon Em Connect to SMC Web Site Apply Reever Help Figure 3 1 Home Page Note The examples in this chapter are based on the SMC8748M Other than the number of fixed ports there are no major differences between the SMC8724M and SMC8748M 3 3 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuration Options Configurable parameters have a dialog box o
239. dify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in non volatile storage use the copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes e Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as hostname and snmp server community e Access Control List Configuration These commands are used for packet filtering Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation ENTERING COMMANDS Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include command such as parity and databits VLAN Configuration Includes the command to create VLAN groups e Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration These commands configure settings for the selected multiple spanning tree instance To enter the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands Console configure Console config To enter the other modes at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Table 4 2 Configuration Commands Mode Command Prom
240. direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN However note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN ie associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To adda trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration Fill in the required settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration Garp carp CARE P rtl PVID Acceptable Ingress GVRP ose Ther bh Mode Trunk ee Frame Type Filtering Status Centi Centi asc Member Seconds Seconds 3 20 1000 60 3000 18000 DR mal lelwi in fl ALLS enabled M Enabled fzo feo foo Hyona y ft ALL y Enabled M Enabled 20 60 foo Hybnd y fs Tagged y TM Enabled M Enabled 20 60 fiooo Hybrid fo ALL y r Enabled M Enabled 20 feo frooo Hybrid ho a E F Enabled F Enabled 30 a0 2000 Hybrid y ho ALC FM Enabled M Enabled 20 60 000 Hybrid Figure 3 78 VLAN Port Configuration 3 179 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID enables GVRP sets the GARP timers and then sets the switchport mode to
241. dundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails However before making any physical connections between devices use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take note of the following points e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop e You can create up to 32 trunks on the switch with up to eight ports per trunk Note that because the stack functions conceptually as a single system you can include ports from different units in the same stack For example you could connect ports spread across several units that belong to VLAN 2 into a common trunk The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports When configuring static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings PORT CONFIGURATION All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN STA VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage When configuring static trunks you may not be able to link switches of different types depending o
242. e Related Commands ip domain name 4 166 ip name server 4 168 hosts This command displays the static host name to address mapping table Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Note that a host name will be displayed as an alias if it is mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address 10 1 0 55 192 168 1 55 Alias 1 rd6 Console DNS COMMANDS show dns This command displays the configuration of the DNS server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1 055 Console show dns cache This command displays entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN 0 4 CNAME 10 2 44 96 893 pttch_pc accton com tw T 4 CNAME 10 2 44 3 898 ahten accton com tw 2 4 CNAME 66 218 71 84 298 www yahoo akadns net 3 4 CNAME 66 218 71 83 298 www yahoo akadns net 4 4 CNAME 66 218 71 81 298 www yahoo akadns net 5 4 CNAME 66 218 71 80 298 www yahoo akadns net 6 4 CNAME 66 218 71 89 298 www yahoo akadns net 7 4 CNAME 66 218 71 86 298 www yahoo akadns net 8 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 7 298 www yahoo com Console 4 171 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Field Description
243. e allowed management access to the switch through the Web interface SNMP or Telnet Command Usage The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default Once you add an entry to a filter list access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Command Attributes Web IP Filter Configures IP address es for the web group SNMP IP Filter Configures IP address es for the SNMP group Telnet IP Filter Configures IP address es for the Telnet group IP Filter List IP address which are allowed management access to this int
244. e becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree priority This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 4096 Console config spanning tree pathcost method This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 e short Speci
245. e E RRA betel tele SS 10 11 13 18 12 CATA o EA Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN aware devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN awate devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch 3 167 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 168 receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame onto the VLAN s indicated by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unawate device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network VLANs are dynamically configured based on
246. e assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unawate network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging 2 E tagged frames R JE VA VA VA VLAN Aware VU VLAN Unaware E tagged untagged E p frames frames rie j ARARA VA VA VU VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame 3 165 CONFI 3 166 GURING THE SWITCH
247. e 4 4 Command Completion ps aniraa aaa i aa a eee 4 4 Getting Help on Commands ooococcocconoccccccc eee 4 4 Showing Commands 0 00 4 5 Partial Keyword Lookup 0c eee oo 4 6 Negating the Effect of Commands 0000 00005 4 6 Using Command History 0 0 cee ee eee 4 6 Understanding Command Modes 0000s 4 7 Exec Commands ardid alt aves dp ited ahd aa 4 7 Configuration Commands 6 0 ccc rreren 4 8 Command Line Processing 00 4 10 Command Groups ery eaha a ea E eens 4 11 Taine C mmands mia s anA ceded E dd 4 13 vii CONTENTS E ANA ASA ie he Mets 4 14 A RS E E RN ANA 4 15 PASS WOT it ia tai aS 4 16 timeout login response serren se eee eee 4 17 CXCCAUMEOUL Mi AAA te A 4 18 password thresh 2 0 ccc ccoo 4 19 lent UHE oss gests hehe sot Seay dd 4 20 databits onto Sau td fats da Roars flies gate eit ag 4 20 PAtlty xe ike lus Cae ae Nh TAR 4 21 Spec sheen hs sill hed IL da Sees td SS ty 4 22 StOpbits PE ones acs ia tana eet od 4 23 GISCONNMECE as sho SA a ahs Gata ee oe A 4 23 show line 244 Mi tice glia thas ist ao a 4 24 General Comimands s s cnet EE cups RS eats EE Sates ALY oy 4 25 Enable coi eds ston ne kone ahead Sha a de 4 26 disable EA aoe nia RENE eE ne ag a 4 27 CONMOUPE vii och Aa thin Mi hah is ae honey eee ea Sees 4 27 SHOW IStOty ne itd ie athe DE helt ts Lo 4 28 Plo ro se kl tet sai dR aed alah e a 4 29 OS EN Mien has a Rien Mae eee 4 29 E A a Oe AA
248. e SNMP notifications Syntax no snmp server enable traps authentication link up down e authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure traps link up down Keyword to issue link up or link down traps Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you do not enter an snmp server enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command If you enter the command with no keywords both authentication and link up down notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled The snmp server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp server host command Use the snmp server host command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications In order to send notifications you must configure at least one snmp server host command 4 153 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 151 snmp setver engine id This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine Use the no form to restore the default Syntax snmp server engine id local engineid string no snmp server engine id loc
249. e Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage This switch provides four priority queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Command Attributes e Default Priority The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0 10 CLI displays this information as Priority for untagged traffic 3 186 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Number of Egress Traffic Classes The number of queue buffers provided for each port Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Default Port Priority Port Default Priority 0 7
250. e both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model e Read View The configured view for read access Range 1 64 characters e Write View The configured view for write access Range 1 64 characters 3 54 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Groups Click New to configure a new group In the New Group page define a name assign a security model and level and then select read and write views Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list To delete a group check the box next to the group name then click Delete SNMPv3 Groups _ Delete Model Level Read View Write View I public v1 noAuthNoPriv defaultview none I public noAuthNoPriv defaultview none E private jul defaultview defaultview T private y2c SNMPv3 Groups New Group Properties Group Name Security Model v F Security Level noAuthNoPriv SNMPv3 Views G Read View O defaultview G Write View defaultview Bock Aua Figure 3 28 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 3 55 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Use the snmp server group command to configure a new group specifying the security model and level and restricting MIB access to defined read and write views Console config Hsnmp server group v3secure v3 priv read defaultview writ
251. e defaultview 4 158 Console config exit Console show snmp group 4 159 Group Name v3secure Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Setting SNMPv3 Views SNMPv3 views ate used to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Attributes View Name The name of the SNMP view Range 1 64 characters e View OID Subtrees Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view Edit OID Subtrees Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string e Type Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included or excluded from the SNMP view 3 56 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Views Click New to configure a new view In the New View page define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included or excluded in the view Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3 Views list For a specific view click on View OID Subtrees to display the current configuration or click on Edit OID Subtrees to make changes to the view settings To delete a view check the box next to the view name
252. e it Syntax no ip igmp snooping querier Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp snooping querier Console config ip igmp snooping query count This command configures the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default Setting 2 times Command Mode Global Configuration 4 281 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping query max
253. e new operation code reboot the system via the System Reset menu Copy tip to file lt TFTP Server IP Address File Type opcode Source File Name sz Destination File Name of Figure 3 8 Copy Firmware 3 23 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH If you download to a new destination file go to the File Management Set Start Up menu mark the operation code file used at startup and click Apply To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Set Start Up Name Type Startup Size bytes le Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_ File In a55 claos ComigFile N 10874 6 statupt cfg Config_File Y ases 6 BLANC_17_V1004 BX Operation_CodelY 3101732 e vacoz1 Operation CodeIN 3421124 Figure 3 9 Setting the Startup Code To delete a file select System File Management Delete Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick box and click Apply Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted Delete T Name Type Startup Size bytes Ir Factory_Default_Config cig Config_File In 1455 i T laos Config File N hoza startup1 cfg Config_File Y 14584 m BLANC_17_V1004 8K Operation Code Y 3101732 rr M1 Operation CodelN 3421124 Figure 3 10 Deleting Files 3 24 BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI To download new firmware from a TFTP server enter the IP address of the TFTP server sel
254. e on the switch You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN 1D 1 y Multicast Router List Unitl Port11 Static Figure 3 94 Multicast Router Port Information 3 205 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 206 CLI This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 286 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast
255. e tags to hardware queues Priority Layer 3 and 4 Maps TCP ports IP precedence tags or IP 4 267 DSCP tags to class of service values 4 259 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Priority Commands Layer 2 Table 4 64 Priority Commands Layer 2 switchport operational status of an interface Command Function Mode Page queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or GC 4 260 Weighted Round Robin WRR switchport priority Sets a port priority for incoming untagged IC 4 260 default frames queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the GC 4 262 priority queues queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the IC 4 263 priority queues show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4 265 show queue Shows round robin weights assigned to PE 4 265 bandwidth the priority queues show queue cos map Shows the class of service map PE 4 266 show interfaces Displays the administrative and PE 4 186 queue mode This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin WRR for the class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax 4 260 queue mode strict wrr no queue mode strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the priority queues higher priority queues before servicing lower e wrr Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress
256. ecedence to CoS Values IP Precedence Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CoS Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a one to one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces PRIORITY COMMANDS Example The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Hmap ip precedence 1 cos 0 Console config if map ip dscp Global Configuration This command enables IP DSCP mapping i e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping Syntax no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config map ip dscp Con
257. ecified then the public keys for all users ate displayed e When an RSA key is displayed the first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 35 and the last string is the encoded modulus When a DSA key is displayed the first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS and the last string is the encoded modulus Example Console show public key host Host RSA 1024 65537 1568499540186766925933394677505461732531367489083654725415020245593 199868544358361651999923329781766065830958610825913212890233765468017262725714 134287629413011961955667825956641048695742788814620651941746772984865468615717 739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839717526463580581767167095748 04776117 DSA ssh dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV yrDbKSt I1lnzD Dg0h2Hxc YV44sXZ2JXhamLK6 P8bvuiyacWbUW a4 PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2XFf AKx15fwFfiv J1Pd0kFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBHOZ4mUZpE8 5 PWxDZMaCNBPJj BrRAAAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjwbvwrN LaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5 YWDC99ebYHNRJ 5kh4 7wY4i8cZvH p9cnrfwFTMU01VFD1y3IR 2G3 95NLy50d7ZDxfA9mCOLT yyEfbobMJZi 80GCst SNOxrZZVnMqwrTYfdrkKx7YKBw Kjw6Bm iFq70 jAhf1Dg4510Ac27s6TLdtnyl1wRq ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOy Dbs1oBf PuSAb4oAsyj KXKVYNLOkTLZ cFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2 o dvzxX4Gg yqdT1YmGA7 fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0 fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 wOW Console
258. ect config as the file type then enter the source and destination file names When the file has finished downloading set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch To start the new firmware enter the reload command or reboot the system Console copy tftp file 4 84 TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name v1005 bix Destination file name v1005 bix Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console config Console config boot system opcode v1005 4 90 Console config exit Console reload 4 29 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings Command Attributes File Transfer Method The configuration copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to running config Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration file to startup config Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server running config to file Copies the running configuration to a file 3 25 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH running config to
259. ed ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown below Table 4 37 Egress Queue Priority Mapping Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 4 142 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Example Console config int eth 1 5 Console config if map access list mac M5 cos 0 Console config if Related Commands queue cos map 4 263 show map access list mac 4 143 show map access list mac This command shows the CoS value mapped to a MAC ACL for the current interface The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule Syntax show map access list mac interface interface ethernet wnit port e unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map access list mac Access list to COS of Eth 1 5 Access list M5 cos 0 Console Related Commands map access list mac 4 142 4 143 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE match access list mac This command changes the IEEE 802 1p priority of a Layer 2 frame matching the defined ACL rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking Use the no form to remove the ACL marker Syntax match access list mac ac _name set priority priority no match access list mac ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag
260. ed VLANs and pass the message on to all other ports VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network This allows GVRP compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requests To implement GVRP in a network first add the host devices to the required VLANs using the operating system or other application software so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network For both the edge switches attached directly to these hosts and core switches in the network enable GVRP on the links between these devices You VLAN CONFIGURATION should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs Note If you have host devices that do not support GVRP you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices as described in Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 173 But you can still enable GVRP on these edge switches as well as on the core switches in the network LLL LECET G N 2 9 3 4 Port based VLAN TEO ao ra
261. ed to the default VLAN for this interface Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier e Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 VLAN ID VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4093 Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Select a a port or trunk enter a protocol group ID the corresponding VLAN ID and click Apply Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Interface Pon 1 SJ C Trunk 2 Query Current Now none lt Add Protocol Group ID 1 2147483547 Remove VLAN ID 1 4093 Figure 3 82 Protocol VLAN Port Configuration CLI The following maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 3 4 251 Console config if 3 185 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Class of Service Configuration Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Layer 2 Queu
262. edence IP DSCP Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Layer 2 Additional Features BOOTP client CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol RMON Remote Monitoring groups 1 2 3 9 SMTP Email Alerts Management Features A 2 In Band Management Telnet Web based HTTP or HTTPS SNMP manager or Secure Shell Out of Band Management RS 232 DB 9 console port SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS Software Loading TFTP in band or XModem out of band SNMP Management access via MIB database Trap management to specified hosts RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 Statistics History Alarm Event Standards IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities IEEE 802 1p Priority tags IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1v Protocol based VLANs IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1 w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication IEEE 802 3 Ethernet IEEE 802 3u Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3x Full duplex flow control ISO IEC 8802 3 IEEE 802 3z Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab 1000BASE T IEEE 802 3ac VLAN tagging TEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol ARP RFC 826 DHCP Client RFC 1541 HTTPS ICMP REC 792 IGMP RFC 1112 IGMPv2 RFC 2236 RADIUS RFC 2618 RMON RFC 1757 groups 1 2 3 9 SNMP RFC 1157 A 3 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS SNMPv2 RFC 2571 SNMPv3 RFC 3414 RFC 2570 RFC 2273 RFC 3411 amp RFC 3415 SNTP
263. ee rules 1 Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through 2 Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP ACCESS CONTROL LISTS 3 Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any 4 120 Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config ext acl Configuring a MAC ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain all permit rules deny rules or a combination of both Default Permit rules Source Destination Address Type Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to indicate a specific MAC address or MAC to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination MAC Address Source or destination MAC address Source Destination MAC Bit Mask Hexidecimal mask for source ot destination MAC address VID VLAN ID Range 1 4093 VID Bit Mask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4093 Ethernet T
264. eee a 4 55 Event Logging Commands 0 cece cee eee 4 56 JOO CIN GON cl eare a dil ce bod ne aad nN 4 57 logging history ss tiated ae alae dio a aot 4 58 o A OS O 4 59 lopoino facility oseane da 4 60 IO OPIN GTAP A de DD 4 61 Cleat JOR lt a coset A e is ci 4 62 show a A E hi ae ethos hbase 4 62 SNOW LO irs a Aen cs ena Sai Nee a ea 4 64 SMTP Alert Commands 0 6 00 cece eee 4 65 logging sendmail host 0 6 6 eee eee 4 66 logging sendmail level 0 0 0 eee 4 67 logging sendmail source email oooo oooommmmo 4 67 logging sendmail destination email oo oooo o 4 68 logging sedma aiii A ed ee oe 4 69 show logging sendmail 0 eee 4 69 Time Commands 2rd chain ch atte a ae 4 70 sotp clienta ga ad hi Dalt dba ality 4 70 SAP SELV RO 4 71 Sp polls caster O RE A 4 72 Show SHED a di ie 4 73 ix CONTENTS clock timezone ica ra 4 73 calendar set lis ad cria dd fhe tis 4 74 showscalendat ia ta aE 4 75 System Status Commands 0 cece ee eee ee 4 76 show startup config 6 6 eee eee eee 4 76 show running config 6 6 eee ee 4 77 SHOW SYSTE o aaa sr O wate aoe duh a echoes 4 80 SHOW SELS a Biase ti Beare Gad oe Ses beens Gah heals 4 81 SHOW VETSIOf ii a ace utes Aen ae a AS 4 81 Frame Size Commands Lietenn dia ib la 4 82 JUMbO ame ua aR oad Menace noua i 4 82 Flash File Commands nt E AER ORR PER SA Ble 4 84 COPE a Nas 4 84 delta A Diy A e Sed acti AL 4 87 LS Sait ON E
265. een Port Statistics Interface Pon 1 y C Trunk gt Query Interface Statistics Received Octets 15020 Received Unicast Packets 0 Received Multicast 177 Recewed Broadcast 0 Packets Packets __ Received Discarded Received Unknown 0 Packets Packets Received Errors O Transmit Octets 168087 a 3 Transmit Multicast 9 Transmit Unicast Packets 0 Packets 2420 Transmit Broadcast 47 Transmit Discarded 0 Packets Packets Transmit Errors ol Figure 3 60 Port Statistics Port CONFIGURATION Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors O Late Collisions 0 FCS Errors 0 Excessive Collisions D Internal MAC Transmit Single Collision Frames Entra D Multiple Collision Frames D Carrier Sense Errors D SQE Test Errors O Frames Too Long 0 Deferred Transmissions aral MAS Hoca D Fases o UA a RMON Statistics Drop Events 0 Jabbers 0 Received Bytes 188155 Collisions 0 Received Frames 064 Bytes Frames 2249 Broadcast Frames _47 65 127 Bytes Frames 459 Multicast Frames 2672 128 255 Bytes Frames 1 CRC Alignment Errors 0 256 511 Bytes Frames 0 Undersize Frames 0512 1023 Bytes Frames 0 Oversize Frames 0 1024 1518 Bytes Frames 0 Fragments 0 Refresh xl Figure 3 61 Port Statistics continued 3 133 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows statistics for port 13 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 13 4 184 Ethernet 1 13 Iftable stats Oc
266. efault Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 Related Commands spanning tree cost 4 225 spanning tree edge port This command specifies an interface as an edge port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no spanning tree edge port 4 226 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning
267. eject packet If authentication is successful the switch allows the client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked 3 77 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 78 The operation of 802 1X on the switch requires the following The switch must have an IP address assigned e RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the RADIUS server specified e Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1x Auto mode e Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client software installed and properly configured The RADIUS server and 802 1X client support EAP The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type The current version of the firmware supports only the EAP MD5 authentication type Some clients have native support in Windows otherwise the dot1x client must support it Displaying 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides port authentication The 802 1X protocol must be enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control The global setting for 802 1X Web Click Security 802 1X Information 802 1X Information 802 1X System Authentication Control Disabled Figure 3 36 802 1X Global Informati
268. electing IP Precedence DSCP Priority The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority Select one of the methods or disable this feature Command Attributes Disabled Disables both priority services This is the default setting IP Precedence Maps layer 3 4 priorities using IP Precedence IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping Web Click Priority IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Select Disabled IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll down menu IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence y Figure 3 87 IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status CLI The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch Console config Hmap ip precedence 4 269 Console config Mapping IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The default IP Precedence values are mapped one to one to Class of 3 193 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Service values i e Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0 and so forth Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control and the other bits for various application types ToS bits are defined in the following table Table 3 13 Mapping IP Precedence Priority
269. ement access 2 Switch contacts authentication server 3 Authentication server challenges client 4 Client responds with proper password or key 5 Authentication server approves access 6 Switch grants management access Access Controller RADIUS Access Control Mets System Plus TACACS ate logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS awate devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet Command Usage By default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name password pair The user name password and
270. en define customized groups and views for the SNMP clients that require access SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Enabling the SNMP Agent Enables SNMPv3 service for all management clients 1 e versions 1 2c 3 Command Attributes SNMP Agent Status Enables SNMP on the switch Web Click SNMP Agent Status Enable the SNMP Agent by marking the Enabled checkbox and click Apply SNMP Agent Status Snmp Agent Status F Enabled Figure 3 23 Enabling the SNMP Agent CLI The following example enables SNMP on the switch Console config snmp server 4 147 Console config Setting Community Access Strings You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access by clients using SNMP v1 and v2c All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability The switch supports up to five community strings e Current Displays a list of the community strings currently configured Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Default strings public read only private read write Range 1 32 characters case sensitive 3 47 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH e Access Mode Specifies the access rights for the community string Read Only Author
271. en transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout sumber_of_seconds no radius server timeout number _of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 4 97 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config show radius setver This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show radius server Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Console TACACS Client 4 98 Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Table 4 30 TACACS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page tacacs server host Specifies the TACACS server GC 4 99 tacacs server port Specifies the TACACS server network G
272. en up to four sessions to the device via Telnet Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port You can enter commands as follows To enter a simple command enter the command keyword COMMAND LINE INTERFACE To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console show startup config To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0 smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity In the logging history exam
273. endmail 4 69 SMTP servers 92 168 1 4 2 9256768135 SMTP minimum severity level 4 SMTP destination email addresses joe company com SMTP source email address bill company com SMTP status Enabled Console Renumbering the Stack 3 40 If the units are no longer numbered sequentially after several topology changes or failures you can reset the unit numbers using the Renumbering command Just remember to save the new configuration settings to a startup configuration file prior to powering off the stack Master Command Usage The startup configuration file maps configuration settings to each switch in the stack based on the unit identification number You should BASIC CONFIGURATION therefore remember to save the current configuration after renumbering the stack e For a line topology the stack is numbered from top to bottom with the first unit i e the unit with no connection on the Up port in the stack designated as unit 1 For a ring topology the Master unit taken as the top of the stack and is numbered as unit 1 and all other units are numbered sequentially down through the ring Web Click System Renumbering Renumbering by selecting Renumbering Renumbering Figure 3 19 Renumbering the Stack CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch Console switch all renumber 4 33 Console Resetting the System Web Click System Reset Click the Reset but
274. ent Authentication The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3 Protocol DNS COMMANDS Table 4 43 show snmp user display description Field Description Privacy Protocol The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3 Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry DNS Commands These commands ate used to configure Domain Naming System DNS services You can manually configure entries in the DNS domain name to IP address mapping table configure default domain names or specify one or more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Note that domain name services will not be enabled until at least one name server is specified with the ip name server command and domain lookup is enabled with the ip domain lookup command Table 4 44 DNS Commands Command Function Mode Page ip host Creates a static host name to address GC 4 164 mapping clear host Deletes entries from the host PE 4 165 name to address table ip domain name Defines a default domain name for GC 4 166 incomplete host names ip domain list Defines a list of default domain names for GC 4 167 incomplete host names ip name server Specifies the address of one or more name GC 4 168 servers to use for host name to address translation ip domain lookup Enables DNS based host name to address GC 4 169 translation show hosts Displays the
275. equired specify 8 data bits per character Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config line databits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 4 21 parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity e even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity Command Mode Line Configuration 4 21 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting Example To specify no parity enter this command Console config line parity none Console config line speed 4 22 This command sets the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed bps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps or auto Default Setting auto Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported If you select the auto option the switch will automati
276. er or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp server enable traps command Example Console show snmp SNMP Agent enabled SNMP traps Authentication enable Link up down enable SNMP communities 1 private and the privilege is read write 2 public and the privilege is read only 0 SNMP packets input O Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name supplied Encoding errors Number of requested variables Number of altered variables Get request PDUs Get next PDUs 0 Set request PDUs 0 SNMP packets output 0 Too big errors No such name errors Bad values errors General errors Response PDUs Trap PDUs SNMP logging disabled Console o0o0ooooo ooooo SNMP COMMANDS snmp server community This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community string ro rw no snmp server community string e string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Default Setting e public Read only access Authorized management stations are only a
277. erface 3 85 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Start IP Address A single IP address or the starting address of a range End IP Address The end address of a range Web Click Security IP Filter Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that are allowed management access to an interface and click Add IP Filtering Entry Telnet IP Filter 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Telnet IP Filter List Start IP Address End IP Address Add Telnet IP Filtering Entry Remove Telnet IP Filtering Entry E Figure 3 40 IP Filter CLI This example restricts management access for Telnet clients Console config management telnet client 192 168 1 19 4 37 Console config management telnet client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console config exit Console show management all client 4 38 Management IP Filter HTTP Client Start IP address End SNMP Client Start IP address End TELNET Client Start IP address End E 9216861529 192 2 192 168 1 25 192 Console P address 3 86 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rule
278. ernet 1 5 config if lowcontrol config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 176 capabilities flowcontrol symmetric 4 177 media type This command forces the port type selected for combination ports 21 24 45 48 Use the no form to restore the default mode Syntax media type ode no media type mode copper forced Always uses the built in RJ 45 port sfp forced Always uses the SFP port even if a module is not installed sfp preferred auto Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link 4 179 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting sfp preferred auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Example This forces the switch to use the built in RJ 45 port for the combination port 21 Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 21 Console config if combo forced mode copper forced Console config if shutdown This command disables an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no shutdown Default Setting All interfaces are enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons Example The following example disables port 5
279. ers display description Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Unknown Pkts Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Pkts Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Console show lacp internal Channel group 1 Oper Key 3 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 2 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Table 4 51 show lacp internal display description Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Table 4 51 show lacp internal di
280. es have the following characteristics Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down e Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table lt A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command Example Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset Console config clear mac address table dynamic This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 207 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console clear mac address table dynamic Console show mac address table This command shows classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface nterface vlan v an id sort address vlan interfacej mac address MAC address mask Bits to match in the address interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channel id Range 1 32 vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 sort
281. et Example Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask acl Related Commands mask MAC ACL 4 138 mac access group 4 141 mask MAC ACL This command defines a mask for MAC ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Use the no form to remove a mask Syntax no mask pktformat any host source bitmask any host destination bitmask vid vid bitmask ethertype ezhertype bitimask e pktformat Check the packet format field If this keyword must be used in the mask the packet format must be specified in ACL rule to match e any Any address will be matched e host The address must be for a single node e source bitmask The source address of the rule must match this bitmask destination bitmask The destination address of the rule must match this bitmask e vid Check the VLAN ID field vid bitmask VLAN ID of tule must match this bitmask 4 138 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS e ethertype Check the Ethernet type field etbertype bitmask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask Default Setting None Command Mode MAC Mask Command Usage Up to seven masks can be assigned to an ingress or egress ACL e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and no
282. etting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config interface ethernet 1 25 Console config if mac access group jerry in Console config if Related Commands show mac access list 4 137 show mac access group This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 141 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show mac access group Interface ethernet 1 5 MAC access list M5 out Console Related Commands mac access group 4 141 map access list mac This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping Syntax no map access list mac ac _name cos cos value acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters cos value CoS value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule e A packet matching a rule within the specifi
283. etting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage For a description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 3 12 e The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates FAIL contact your distributor for assistance Example Console show system System description SMC8748M SMC8724M System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 42 System information System Up time 0 days 2 hours 3 minutes and 47 49 seconds System Name R amp D5 System Location wc 9 System Contact Geoff MAC address unitl 00 30 F1 DF 9C A0 Web server enable Web server port 80 Web secure server enable Web secure server port 443 Telnet server enable Telnet server port 23 Jumbo Frame Disabled POST result DUMMY TABOE ts e 4 6 PASS UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM Testi sis decias aie e PASS TAMEEOTESt ic PASS PEE Device I TEST tdi c Sark PASS I2C Bus Initialization PASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Crossbar Int Loopback Test PASS Fan Speed TESt cnica oc PASS Done All Pass Console SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The session used to execute this command is indicated by a symbol next to
284. fOUP oooccocoooococccc 4 SNMP Gommands s id A E E AA E 4 SAMP ii 4 show Snip AI ei 4 snmp server COMMUNILY 6 ee eee 4 SMMp SerVver CONTAC eee 4 snmp setver location 1 0 6 cece eee 4 snimip server host Li ad al uk oi dt AE Re dae 4 snmp server enable traps 6 cece eee eee 4 smmp server engine id o essari a S AA a 4 show snmp engine id ssuus eee cece ee 4 SHP SETVE VIEW i bo wt cL Aaa het a ee AE 4 show Simp VE Wai va eed adda ae os 4 SHIMP SELVEt OTOUP A Mid eis leah eG de es a 4 showsnimp STOUp ives ibe dra a 4 STLIMP SELVER USER god cots SOL gece ae Soda gals a wad eve eustece dal 4 Show SAMP User ii as 4 DNS Commands js oi cesses De oases We Sas Pe 4 Piotr dis Ae ae ag 4 elean hosti cave tc A REO AN 4 ip domain Hamne a atada 4 Ip domains A a R A 4 Ip MAMe Servers ax ithe aa da 4 Ip domialn lOOku pes ite dict bie a aye ead AERE ak we eae 4 Show hostias Li ada tetas alee ce 4 SHOW GAS seram Tia IS o Bid aM ah alr 4 show d s cache a aks a ee ha eae aH 4 clear dns ciche manr A a AOI 4 Interface Commands 1 6 R A SARR E EAAS 4 ICAC ys os a raoa See a ae a A e aa RS 4 ESCH P HOR sete a eA ah R A A 4 speed d pl x 00d da des ds 4 Negotaton AA i nes 4 capabilities as ta a a a 2 4 tlowconttol 23335260 dd a 4 xii 145 146 147 148 149 150 150 151 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168
285. face ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 o 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Related Commands map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 271 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 272 4 275 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to 8 8 receive the multicast service Table 4 69 Multicast Filtering Commands Command Groups Function Page IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping 4 276 or static assignment sets the IGMP version displays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for 4 280 multicast filtering at Layer 2 Static Multicast Configures static multicast router ports 4 285 Routing IGMP Snoop
286. faces table and the mask selects all index entries Console config Hsnmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included Console config show snmp view This command shows information on the SNMP views Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp view View Name mib 2 Subtree OID 1 2 2 3 6 2 1 View Type included Storage Type permanent Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type permanent Row Status active Console Table 4 41 show snmp view display description Field Description View Name Name of an SNMP view Subtree OID A branch in the MIB tree View Type Indicates if the view is included or excluded Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry 4 157 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE snmp setvet group This command adds an SNMP group mapping SNMP users to SNMP views Use the no form to remove an SNMP group Syntax snmp server group groupname v1 v2c v3 auth noauth ptiv read readvien write writevien no snmp server group groupname groupname Name of an SNMP group Range 1 32 characters e v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 e auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and ptivacy readview Defines the view for read access 1 64 characters e writeview Defines
287. fault 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters USER AUTHENTICATION Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range 1 65535 Default 5 e TACACS Settings Note Server IP Address Address of the TACACS server Default 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username in Table 4 10 3 63 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 64 Web Click Security Authentication Settings To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence 1 e one to three methods fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS authentication if selected and click Apply Authentication Settings lAuthentication loca y RADIUS Settings Global Serveindex C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
288. fect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands ENTERING COMMANDS Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table Table 4 1 Command Modes Class Mode Exec Notmal Privileged Configuration Global Access Control List Interface Line Multiple Spanning Tree VLAN Database You must be in Privileged Exec
289. fic source or destination IP addresses protocol types source or destination protocol ports or TCP control codes Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny protocol number udp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence tos tos dscp dsp source port sport bitmask destination port dport port bitmask no permit deny tcp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence tos tos dscp dsp source port sport bitmask destination port dport port bitmask control flag control flags flag bitmask protocol number A specific protocol number Range 0 255 source Source IP address destination Destination IP address address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 tos Type of Service level Range 0 15 dscp DSCP priority level Range 0 64 sport Protocol source port number Range 0 65535 e dport Protocol 3 destination port number Range 0 65535 port bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 control flags Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 flag bi
290. fies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 4 217 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting Long method Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Note that path cost page 4 225 takes precedence over port priority page 4 226 Example Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 218 This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree mst configuration Use this command to change to Multiple Spanning Tree MST configuration mode Default Setting e No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance The region name is set the switch s MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config spanning tree
291. figuration 4 33 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example shows how to renumber all units Console switch all renumber Console User Access Commands username 4 34 The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking v a the console or a Telnet connection page 4 13 user authentication v a a remote authentication server page 4 91 and host access authentication for specific ports page 4 104 Table 4 9 User Access Commands Command Function Mode Page username Establishes a user name based authentication GC 4 34 system at login enable password Sets a password to control access to the GC 4 36 Privileged Exec level This command adds named usets requires authentication at login specifies or changes a user s password or specify that no password is required or specifies or changes a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username name access level level no password password 0 7 password no username name name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 e access level eve Specifies the user level The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopassword No password is required for this user to log in e 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encryp
292. figuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click System File Management Copy Operation Choose tftp to startup config or tftp to file and enter the IP address of the TFTP server Specify the name of the file to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name and then click Apply Copy titp to startup config h TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 1 19 Source File Name config startup Fectory_Default_Config ctg E startup Startup File Name Figure 3 11 Downloading Configuration Settings for Start Up If you download to a new file name using tftp to startup config or tftp to file the file is automatically set as the start up configuration file To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu You can also select any configuration file as the start up configuration by using the Syste File Management Set Start Up page Set Start Up Name i Type A Startup Size bytes C Factory_Default_Config efg C onfig_File N 455 C qos Config _File N 10874 startup1 cfg ConfigFie Y 14584 BLANC_17_VI004
293. for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254 15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206 51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839 71752646358058176716709574804776117 Import Clients Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command page 4 84 to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3 59 The clients are subsequently USER AUTHENTICATION authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199696317 81366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938006090253948 40848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150 45306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 4 Set the Optional Parameters On the SSH Settings page configure the optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and
294. for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management access Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 0 0 0 BASIC CONFIGURATION Default Gateway IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Manual Configuration Web Click System IP Configuration Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to Static enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway then click Apply IP Configuration Management VLAN fi y IP Address Mode Static y IP Address 182 168 154 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 253 MAC Address 00 30 F1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Figure 3 6 Manual IP Configuration CLI Specify the management interface IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 174 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 4 288 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 4 289 Console config 3 19 CONFIGURING THE SWI
295. for use in autonegotiation flowconttol Enables flow control on a given IC 4 178 interface media type Force port type selected for IC 4 179 combination ports shutdown Disables an interface IC 4 180 switchport broadcast Configures the broadcast storm IC 4 181 packet rate control threshold clear counters Cleats statistics on an interface PE 4 182 show interfaces status Displays status for the specified NE PE 4 183 interface show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified NE PE 4 184 counters interfaces show interfaces Displays the administrative and NE PE 4 186 4 173 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE interface This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 e vlan v an id Range 1 4093 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify port 24 enter the following command Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description This command adds a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1
296. g interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if garp timer join 100 Console config if Related Commands show garp timer 4 258 show garp timer This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface Syntax show garp timer interface interface ethernet wnit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows all GARP timers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show garp timer ethernet 1 1 Eth 1 1 GARP timer status Join timer 20 centiseconds Leave timer 60 centiseconds Leaveall timer 1000 centiseconds Console Related Commands garp timer 4 257 4 258 PRIORITY COMMANDS Priority Commands The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Table 4 63 Priority Commands Command Groups Function Page Priority Layer 2 Configures default priority for untagged frames 4 260 sets queue weights and maps class of servic
297. g logging history ram 0 Console config logging host This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove a syslog server host Syntax no logging host host_7p_address host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP addresses The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Example Console config logging host 10 1 0 3 Console config 4 59 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE logging facility 4 60 This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Use the no form to return the type to the default Syntax no logging facility Ape type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database Example Console config logging facility 19 Console config SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS logging trap This command enables the logging
298. ge level must be configured on the authentication server 4 93 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication enable radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication enable radius Console config Related Commands enable password sets password for changing command modes 4 36 RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 29 RADIUS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4 95 radius server port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4 96 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4 96 radius server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 4 97 radius server timeout Sets the inte
299. ged unless you are experiencing difficulties with GVRP tegistration deregistration Command Attributes PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group Acceptable Frame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Options All Tagged Default All Ingress Filtering Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Default Disabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames 3 177 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Ifingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port Ifingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames
300. gestion and prevent the loss of 1 3 INTRODUCTION 1 4 packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded The switch supports flow control based on the IEEE 802 3x standard Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports up to 32 trunks Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted If broadcast traffic rises above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the thre
301. ghts Syntax queue bandwidth veight1 weight4 no queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 The ratio of weights for queues O 3 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 15 4 262 PRIORITY COMMANDS Default Setting Weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 are assigned to queues 0 7 respectively Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights Example This example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues for port 5 Console configure Console config int eth 1 5 Console config if queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Console config if Related Commands show queue bandwidth 4 265 queue cos map This command assigns class of service CoS values to the priority queues 1 e hardware output queues 0 7 Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map gueue_id cos7 cosn no queue cos map e queue_id The ID of the priority queue Ranges are 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority queue cos cosn The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID It is a space separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority 4 263 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting This switch supports Class of Service by using eight priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for eac
302. gister with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The eight values are mapped one to one to the Class of Service categories by default but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for specific network applications Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Glossary 4 GLOSSARY Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device Multicast Switching A process
303. guration Information 3 121 Port Statistics si sss elisa teed ie ee be 3 128 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 3 188 CoS Priority Levels pence eee eee ee ee eee 3 188 Mapping IP Precedence 0 000000 c eee 3 194 Mapping DSCP Priority srs essorer esi ersris 3 195 Egress Queue Priority Mapping oooooooo o 3 199 Command Modes 364 is sse og eee yia PI bee pea haa 4 7 Configuration Commands ssas seess senr o 4 9 Keystroke Commands 0 00 cess eee 4 10 Command Group Index 0 0 00 e cece 4 11 Line Command Syntax 0 0 eee eee eee 4 13 General Commands sisate 0 0 0 cece ee cece eee 4 25 System Management Commands 000 4 31 Device Designation Commands 004 4 32 User Access Commands psi orean pra eee 4 34 Default Login Settings Venson cise sea eee 4 35 IP Filter Commands mi a 4 37 Web Server Command 0 0 e eee eee 4 39 HTTPS System Support 0 cece eee ees 4 42 Telnet Server Commands 000000000 4 43 Secure Shell Commands 0 0 000 0005 4 45 show ssh display description ooooooommm o 4 54 TABLES xviii Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab e 4 17 e 4 18 e 4 19 e 4 20 e 4 21 e 4 22 e 4 23 e 4 24 e 4 25 e 4 26
304. h port Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown below Table 4 65 Default CoS Priority Levels Queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Priority 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 0 0 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Cos Value gt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Priority Queue 01234567 Console Related Commands show queue cos map 4 266 4 264 PRIORITY COMMANDS show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console sh queue mode Queue mode strict Console show queue bandwidth This command displays the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the eight priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue bandwidth Information
305. hat data traveling over the network arrives unaltered Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol 3 67 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 68 Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 Command Usage The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified on the Authentication Settings page page 3 60 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch SSH Host Key Settings and enable the SSH server Authentication Settings To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair On the SSH Host Key Settings page create a host public private key pair Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry
306. he IP address for a specific multicast service e Multicast Group Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service 3 207 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 208 Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID 1 Multicast IP Address 2241 1 12 Multicast Group Port List Unit Portl User Figure 3 96 IP Multicast Registration Table CLI This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 along with the ports propagating the corresponding services The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 279 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 202 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating ho
307. he Telnet Interface CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current virtual terminal settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line vty 4 14 Console config line login local 4 15 Console config line password 0 secret 4 16 Console config line timeout login response 300 4 17 Console config line exec timeout 600 4 18 Console config line password thresh 3 4 19 Console config line end Console show line 4 24 Console configuration Password threshold 5 times Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time 60 Baudrate auto Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console 3 32 BASIC CONFIGURATION Configuring Event Logging The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages including the type of events that are recorded in switch memory logging to a remote System Log syslog server and displays a list of recent event messages System Log Configuration The system allows you to enable or disable event logging and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems Up to 4096 log entries can be stored in
308. he number of packets received via the interface Packets which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Received Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 10 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that coul
309. hentication md5 sha Uses MD5 or SHA authentication auth password Authentication password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password A minimum of eight characters is required priv des56 Uses SNMPv3 with privacy with DES56 encryption priv password Privacy password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password Default Setting None 4 161 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication privacy digests from the password You should therefore configure the engine ID with the snmp server engine id command before using this configuration command SNMP passwords ate localized using the authoritative SNMP engine ID Example Console config snmp server user steve group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config show snmp user 4 162 This command shows information on SNMP users Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp user EngineId 800000ca030030f1df9ca00000 User Name steve Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Table 4 43 show snmp user display description Field Description Engineld String identifying the engine ID User Name Name of user connecting to the SNMP ag
310. hod Long Transmission Limit 1 10 3 MSTP Configuration Max Instance Numbers 83 Configuration Digest 0xAC36177F50283CD4B93821 DBAB26DEE2 Region Revision 0 65535 Region Name fl df 9c al Max Hop Count 1 40 Figure 3 66 STA Configuration CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Algorithm sets the mode to MST and then configures the STA and MSTP parameters Console config spanning tree 4 212 Console config spanning tree mode mst 4 213 Console config spanning tree priority 4096 4 217 Console config spanning tree hello time 5 4 215 Console config Hspanning tree max age 20 4 216 Console config Hspanning tree forward time 20 4 214 Console config Hspanning tree pathcost method long 4 217 Console config Hkspanning tree transmission limit 4 4 218 Console config Hkspanning tree mst configuration 4 219 Console config mstp revision 1 4 222 Console config mstp name R amp D 4 222 Console config mstp max hops 30 4 223 Console config mstp SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Displaying Interface Settings The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Field Attributes Spanning Tree Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface STA Status Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does n
311. hows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 4 134 Console config mac acl Hpermit any any 4 135 Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 Ef f f f f ff ff ff any vid 3 4 135 Console config mac acl end Console show access list 4 145 MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any VID 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in 4 137 Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 4 138 Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 4 174 Console config if Hmac access group M4 in 4 141 Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any VID 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console Binding a Port to an Access Control List 3 100 After configuring the Access Control Lists ACL you should bind them to the ports that need to filter traffic You can only bind a port to one ACL for each basic type IP ingress IP egress MAC ingress and MAC egress Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port e This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any
312. iLE COMMANDS Command Usage Ifyou enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files A colon is required after the specified unit number e File information is shown below Table 4 26 File Directory Information Column Heading Description file name The name of the file file type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started size The length of the file in bytes Example The following example shows how to display all file information Console dir file name file type startup size byte Unit1 diag_0060 Boot Rom image Y 111360 run 01642 Operation Code N 1074304 run 0200 Operation Code y 1083008 Factory Default_Config cfg Config File N 2574 startup Config File Y 2710 Total free space 0 Console whichboot This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up Syntax whichboot 11H unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Default Setting None 4 89 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot file name file type startup size byte Unit1 diag_0060 Boot Rom image b 111360 run_0200 Operation Code Y 1083008 startup Config File Ye 2710 Console boot s
313. ick Priority IP DSCP Priority Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority DSCP0 Coso gt DSCP1 CoS 0 DSCP 2 CoS 0 DSCP Priority Table DSCP 3 CoS 0 DSCP 4 CoS 0 DSCP5 CoS 0 DSCP6 CoS0 y Class of Serice Value 0 7 1 Restore Default Figure 3 89 IP DSCP Priority CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 1 and then displays the DSCP Priority settings 3 196 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Console config Htmap ip dscp 4 271 Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 1 4 174 Console config 1if Hmap ip dscp 1 cos 0 4 272 Console config if end Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 4 275 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP cos Eth 1 1 o 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 61 0 Eth 1 1 62 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Note Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping IP Port Priority You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP port number i e TCP UDP port number in the frame header Some of the more common TCP service ports include HTTP 80 FTP 21 Telnet 23 and POP3 110 Command Attributes IP Port Priority Status Enables or disables
314. iery z F Enable ery z I Enable jery z I Enable david z O Enable erry z I Enable jerry y Figure 3 48 ACL Port Binding 3 101 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This examples assigns an IP and MAC ingress ACL to port 1 and an IP ingress ACL to port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 174 Console config if ip access group david in 4 128 Console config if mac access group jerry in 4 141 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if ip access group david in Console config if exit Console config if Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status including link state speed duplex mode flow control and auto negotiation Field Attributes Web Name Interface label Type Indicates the port type LOOOBASE T or SFP Admin Status Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled Oper Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down Speed Duplex Status Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Flow Control Status Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled Media Type Shows the forced preferred port type to use for combination ports 21 24 45 48 Copper Forced
315. ies 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config 1f Related Commands negotiation 4 176 speed duplex 4 175 flowcontrol 4 178 flowcontrol 4 178 This command enables flow control Use the no form to disable flow control Syntax no flowcontrol Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and TEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation INTEREACE COMMANDS To force flow control on or off with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To enable flow control under auto negotiation flowcontrol must be included in the capabilities list for any port Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Example The following example enables flow control on port 5 Console Console Console Console config interface eth
316. iews to version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements see page 3 56 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and 2c stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users and set the access level The default strings are e public with read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects private with read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects To prevent unauthorized access to the switch via SNMP version 1 or 2c clients it is recommended that you change the default community strings To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community string mode where string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only 2 To remove an existing string simply type no snmp server community string where string is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt 2 13 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 14 Console config snmp server community admin rw Console config Hsnmp server community
317. if Related Commands spanning tree mst cost 4 229 4 231 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree protocol migration This command re checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration interface interface ethernet wnit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration ot Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces i e RSTP or STP compatible Example Console spanning tree protocol migration eth 1 5 Console 4 232 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS show spanning tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree CST or for an instance within the multiple spanning tree MST Syntax show spanning tree interface mst instance_id interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 instance_id Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Comman
318. if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled Migration If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STA compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STA compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled 3 155 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply
319. ifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4093 Default Setting All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default The default frame type is untagged Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged e Ifa trunk has switchport mode set to trunk 1 e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member Frames are always tagged within the switch The tagged untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress Ifnone of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs the interface should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member Otherwise it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface 4 244 VLAN COMMANDS Ifa VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5
320. ig logging sendmail source email This command sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages Syntax logging sendmail source email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None 4 67 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail source email bill this company com Console config logging sendmail destination email This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages Use the no form to remove a recipient Syntax no logging sendmail destination email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages However you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient Example Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config 4 68 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling Use the no form to d
321. ig exit Console show queue mode 4 265 Queue mode strict Console CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 188 the traffic classes are mapped to one of the four egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Command Attributes e WRR Setting Table 2 Displays a list of weights for each traffic class Le queue Weight Value Set a new weight for the selected traffic class Range 1 15 Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Select the interface highlight a traffic class 1 e output queue enter a weight then click Apply Queue Scheduling Interface G Port C Trun gt Select Traffic Class 0 weight Traffic Class 1 weight 2 WRR Setting Table Trafic Class 2 weight 4 Traffic Class 3 weight 6 Traffic Class 4 weight8 y Weight Value 2 0 15 Figure 3 86 Queue Scheduling 12 CLI shows Queue ID 3 191 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI The following example shows how to a
322. igned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can e Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network e Simplify network management for node changes moves by remotely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than having to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN except where a connection is explicitly defined via the switch s routing service e Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink ports thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured e Use protocol based VLANs such as IP and IPX to restrict traffic to specified interfaces based on protocol type Traffic Prioritization This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level of service using eight priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be
323. iguration ethernet 1 7 Eth 1 7 Gvrp configuration Enabled Console 4 256 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS garp timer This command sets the values for the join leave and leaveall timers Use the no form to restore the timers default values Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall simer_value no garp timer join leave leaveall join leave leaveall Which timer to set e timer_value Value of timer Ranges join 20 1000 centiseconds leave 60 3000 centiseconds leaveall 500 18000 centiseconds Default Setting e join 20 centiseconds e leave 60 centiseconds e leaveall 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP tegistration deregistration Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs Timer values must meet the following restrictions leave gt 2 x join leaveall gt leave Note Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values Otherwise GVRP may not operate successfully 4 257 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console confi
324. ine link ageregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems Admin Key The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG Range 0 65535 Default 1 Port Priority If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Set Port Partner This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link i e the ports on the attached device The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor However configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner PORT CONFIGURATION Web Click Port LACP Aggregation Port Set the System Priority Admin Key and Port Priority for the Port Actor You can optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this
325. ing Commands Table 4 70 IGMP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4 277 ip igmp snooping vlan Adds an interface as a member of a GC 4 277 static multicast group ip igmp snooping Configures the IGMP version for GC 4 278 version snooping show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query PE 4 279 configuration show Shows the IGMP snooping MAC PE 4 279 4 276 mac address table multicast multicast list MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping Console config ip igmp snooping vlan static This command adds a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan id static ip address interface vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 ip address IP address for multicast group interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 Default Setting None 4 277 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Console config
326. ing Static Addresses on page 3 134 VLAN Learning This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning IVL where each port maintains its own filtering database Configurable PVID Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 3 164 BASIC CONFIGURATION Local VLAN Capable This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside of the scope of 802 1Q defined VLANs GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering Web Click System Bridge Extension Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning IVL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No GMRP I Enable Figure 3 5 Bridge Extension Configuration CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 255 Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled
327. interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost cost The path cost for the port Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Setting Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority e When the spanning tree pathcost method page 4 217 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 Console config if 4 225 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree port priority This command configures the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 D
328. interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN 1D and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply VLAN Static Membership by Port Interface Pon 3 Trunk Y Query Member Non Member Vian 1 Vian 2 ae Figure 3 77 VLAN Static Membership by Port CLI This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 3 4 174 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 4 244 Console config if switchport allowed vlan remove 2 3 176 VLAN CONFIGURATION Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types ingress filtering GVRP status and GARP timers Command Usage GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network GARP Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be chan
329. ion User Name david Authentication Password bro Name Data Privacy e O DefaultROGroup y Privacy Protocol Back Change f Privacy Password Bock Ada Figure 3 27 Configuring SNMPv3 Users 3 53 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign itto a group Console config Hsnmp server user chris group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 4 161 Console config exit Console show snmp user 4 162 Engineld 800000ca030030f1df9ca00000 User Name chris Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Configuring SNMPv3 Groups An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users restricting them to specific read and write views You can use the pre defined default groups or create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views Command Attributes e Group Name The name of the SNMP group Range 1 32 characters Model The group security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 e Level The security level used for the group noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications us
330. ion mode login Enables password checking at login LC 4 15 password Specifies a password on a line LC 4 16 timeout login Sets the interval that the system waits for a LC 4 17 response login attempt exec timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter LC 4 18 waits until user input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which LC 4 19 limits the number of failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management LC 4 20 console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data bits per character that LC 4 20 are interpreted and generated by hardware parity Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4 21 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4 22 stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per LC 4 23 byte disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 23 show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE 4 24 PE These commands only apply to the serial port 4 13 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE line 4 14 This command identifies a specific line for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration Com
331. ion on port state Displayed only when the link is up Flow control type Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or none PORT CONFIGURATION CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 5 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type Mac address Configuration Name Port admin Speed duplex Capabilities 1000full Broadcast storm Broadcast storm limit Flow control LACP Port security Max MAC count Port security action media type Current status Link status Operation speed duplex Flow control type Console Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 1000T 00 30 F1 DF 9C A5 Up Auto 10half 10full 100half 100full Enabled 500 packets second Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 None None Down 1000full None 4 183 Configuring Interface Connections You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed duplex mode and flow control Command Attributes Name Allows you to label an interface Range 1 64 characters Admin Allows you to manually disable an interface You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also disable an interface for security reaso
332. is command enables or configures port security Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses Syntax port security action shutdown trap trap and shutdown max mac count address counf no port security action max mac count e action Response to take when port security is violated shutdown Disable port only trap Issue SNMP trap message only trap and shutdown Issue SNMP trap message and disable port e max mac count address count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 where 0 means disabled Default Setting Status Disabled Action None Maximum Addresses 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 102 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Command Usage If you enable port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted First use the port security max mac count command to set the number of addresses and then use the port security command to enable security on the port Use the no port security max mac count command to disable port security and reset the maximum number of addresses to
333. is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication The method used for user authentication MD5 or SHA Privacy The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available Actions Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Web Click SNMP SN MPv3 Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete To change the assigned group of a user click Change Group in the Actions column of the users table and select the new group SNMPv3 Users Authentication Protocol New Delete User Name Group Name Modell Level Authentication Privancy Actions FP daw DefaultROGroup V1 noAuthNoPriv None None Change Group F chris snmpy3users V3 authPriv MD5 DES56 Change Group P steve snmpw3users V3 authNoPriv MD5 None Change Group SNMPv3 Users New SNMPV3 User User Name el Group Name snmpv3use l Security Model vi SNMPv3 Users Edit Security Level noAuthNoPri User Authenticat
334. isable this function Syntax no logging sendmail Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config logging sendmail Console config show logging sendmail This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show logging sendmail SMTP servers 192 168 1 19 SMTP minimum severity level 7 SMTP destination email addresses tedethis company com SMTP source email address billethis company com SMTP status Enabled Console 4 69 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers NTP or SNTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup Table 4 22 Time Commands Command Function Mode Page sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4 70 sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4 70 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for GC 4 72 time show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE 4 73 PE clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal GC 4 73 clock calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4 74 show calendar Display
335. ish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have up to 32 ports The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added ot deleted from a VLAN via the specified port channel STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria Ports must have the same LACP system priority Ports must have the same port admin key Ethernet Interface If the port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed 1 e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group However if the port channel admin key is set then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select the backup link 4 193 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE channel group This command adds a port to a trunk
336. it and continues to update it with information about any subsequent configuration changes made to any unit in the stack If the Master unit fails or is powered off the backup unit will take control of the stack without any loss of configuration settings The Slave unit with the lowest MAC address always functions as the backup unit If you want to ensure a logical fail over to the next unit down in the stack place the Slave unit with the lowest MAC address directly beneath the Master unit in the stack Recovering from Stack Failure or Topology Change 2 6 When a link or unit in the stack fails a trap message is sent and a failure event is logged The stack will reboot after any system failure or topology change It takes two to three minutes for the stack to reboot If the Master unit fails the backup unit will take over operations as the new Master unit reboot the stack and then select another backup unit after the stack finishes rebooting Also note that powering down a unit or inserting a new unit in the stack will cause the stack to reboot If a unit is removed from the stack due to a power down or failure or a new unit added to the stack the original unit IDs are not affected after rebooting and a new unit is assigned the lowest available unit ID Broken Link for Line and Wrap around Topologies All units in the stack must be connected via stacking cable You can connect the units in a simple cascade configuration from
337. itch port with one or more device MAC addresses that ate authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message To use port security specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table page 3 135 When the port has reached the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses USER AUTHENTICATION already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch Command Usage A secure port has the following restrictions It cannot use port monitoring It cannot be a multi VLAN port It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk It should not be conne
338. itchport priority This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 Console config if map ip precedence Global Configuration This command enables IP precedence mapping i e IP Type of Service Use the no form to disable IP precedence mapping Syntax no map ip precedence Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type 4 269 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally Console config map ip precedence Console config map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 270 This command sets IP precedence priority i e IP Type of Service priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip precedence p precedence value cos cos value no map ip precedence precedence value 3 bit precedence value Range 0 7 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The list below shows the default priority mapping Table 4 67 Mapping IP Pr
339. ity model and specified security levels 3 45 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Each group also has a defined security access to set of MIB objects for reading and writing which are known as views The switch has a default view all MIB objects and default groups defined for security models v1 and v2c The following table shows the security models and levels available and the system default settings Table 3 4 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels Model Level Group Read View Write View Security v1 noAuthNoPriv public defaultview none Community string only v1 noAuthNoPriv private defaultview defaultview Community string only v1 noAuthNoPriv user defined user user defined Community defined string only v2c noAuthNoPriv public defaultview none Community string only v2c noAuthNoPriv private defaultview defaultview Community string only v2c noAuthNoPriv user defined user user defined Community defined string only v3 noAuthNoPriv user defined user user defined A user name defined match only v3 AuthNoPriv uset defined user user defined Provides user defined authentication via MD5 or SHA algorithms v3 AutbPriv user defined user user defined Provides user defined authentication via MD5 or SHA algorithms and data privacy using DES 56 bit encryption Note The predefined default groups and view can be deleted from the 3 46 system You can th
340. ized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Read Write Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Web Click SNMP Configuration Add new community strings as required select the access rights from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 Current New lt lt Add Community String spiderman Remove Access Mode Read Write Figure 3 24 Setting Community Community Strings CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config snmp server community spiderman rw 4 149 Console config Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 3 48 Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as SMC Elite View You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Command Attributes Trap Manager Capability This switch supports up to five trap managers Current Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured Trap Manager IP Address IP address of a new management station to receive notification messages Trap
341. k destination port port bitmask control flag lag bitmask e protocol Check the protocol field e any Any address will be matched e host The address must be for a host device not a subnetwork e source bitmask Source address of rule must match this bitmask destination bitmask Destination address of rule must match this bitmask e precedence Check the IP precedence field e tos Check the TOS field e dscp Check the DSCP field source port Check the protocol source port field e destination port Check the protocol destination port field e port bitmask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 control flag Check the field for control flags gt flag bitmask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode IP Mask ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Command Usage e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered e First create the required ACLs and ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface Ifyou enter dscp you cannot enter tos or precedence You can enter both tos and precedence without dscp e Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied
342. l vlan protocol group 1 vlan 2 Console config if show protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups Syntax show protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identifier for a protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Default Setting All protocol groups are displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet Console show protocol vlan protocol group ProtocolGroup ID Frame Type Protocol Type Console 4 252 VLAN COMMANDS show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the selected interfaces Syntax show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting The mapping for all interfaces is displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2 Console show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group Port ProtocolGroup ID Vlan ID Eth 1 1 1 vlan2 Console 4 253 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order
343. ll active console and Telnet sessions NE 4 81 including user name idle time and IP address PE of Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE 4 81 PE This command displays the configuration file stored in non volatile memoty that is used to start up the system Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by cc symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information SNMP community strings SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Users names and access levels VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for the switch Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet Example Console show startup config building startup config please wait username admin access level 15 username admin password 0 admin username guest access level 0 username guest password 0 guest enable password level 15 0 super snmp server community public ro snmp se
344. local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority This priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG e System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems e Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if 4 197 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE lacp admin key Ethernet Interface This command configures a port s LACP administration key Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp actor partner admin key e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link key The port admin key must be set t
345. lticast group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 278 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 283 4 283 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip igmp snooping router port expire time This command configures the query timeout Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port 1 e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect Example The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 278 4 284 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Static Multicast Routing Commands Table 4 72 Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping vlan Adds a multicast router port GC 4 285 mroutet show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports PE 4 286 mroutet
346. luding multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGMP Member Indicates multicast addresses associated 3 208 Port Table with the selected VLAN DNS General Configuration Enables DNS configures domain name and 3 210 domain list and specifies IP address of name servers for dynamic lookup Static Host Table Configures static entries for domain name 3 213 to address mapping Cache Displays cache entries discovered by 3 215 designated name servers 3 11 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Basic Configuration Displaying System Information 3 12 You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name location and contact information Field Attributes System Name Name assigned to the switch system e Object ID MIB II object ID for switch s network management subsystem e Location Specifies the system location e Contact Administrator responsible for the system System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI e MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled Web server port Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface e Web secure server Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled Web secure server port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface e Telnet server Shows if management access
347. mand Usage Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as Vty in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters e g databits do not affect Telnet connections Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config line console Console config line Related Commands show line 4 24 show users 4 81 LINE COMMANDS login This command enables password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a passwotd Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command i e default setting When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the user s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively no login selects no authentication When using this method
348. mand to show the IP port priority map Syntax show map ip port interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0 Console show map ip port TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 80 0 Console Related Commands map ip port Global Configuration 4 268 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 268 4 273 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show map ip precedence This command shows the IP precedence priority map Syntax show map ip precedence nterface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 5 Precedence mapping status enabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 5 0 0 Eth 1 5 1 1 Eth 1 5 2 2 Eth 1 5 3 3 Eth 1 5 4 4 Eth 1 5 5 5 Eth 1 5 6 6 Eth 1 5 7 7 Console Related Commands map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 269 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 270 4 274 PRIORITY COMMANDS show map ip dscp This command shows the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp interface inter
349. mber at 800 762 4968 Customers ate responsible for all shipping charges from their facility to SMC SMC is responsible for return shipping charges from SMC to customer LIMITED WARRANTY WARRANTIES EXCLUSIVE IF AN SMC PRODUCT DOES NOT OPERATE AS WARRANTED ABOVE CUSTOMER S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT IN QUESTION AT SMC S OPTION THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SMC NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS SMC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLECT IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL SMC BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR FOR LOSS OF REVENUE LOSS OF BUSINESS OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING
350. mmands Command Function Mode Page mac address table Maps a static address to a port in GC 4 206 static a VLAN clear Removes any learned entries PE 4 207 mac address table dynamic from the forwarding database show mac address table Displays entries in the PE 4 208 bridge forwarding database mac address table aging time Sets the aging time of the address GC 4 209 table show mac address table Shows the aging time for the PE 4 210 aging time address table mac address table static This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac address table static mac address interface interface vlan v lan d action no mac address table static mac address vlan vlan id mac address MAC address interface ethernet wnit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 4 206 ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mode is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static address
351. n Main Board Serial Number 4429048179 Number of Ports 48 Hardware Version RO1 Internal Power Status Active Management Software EPLD Version 15 15 Loader Version 1 0 1 3 Boot ROM Version 1 0 1 4 Operation Code Version 1 0 0 4 Role Master Figure 3 4 Switch Information 3 15 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Use the following command to display version information Unit ID alt Loader version 1 0 1 3 Boot ROM version 1 0 1 4 Operation code version 1 0 0 4 Console show version 4 81 Unit 1 Serial number A429048179 Hardware version R01 EPLD version 15 15 Number of ports 48 Main power status up Redundant power status not present Agent master Console Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3 16 The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables Field Attributes Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Class of Service Configuration on page 3 186 Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresses Refer to Sett
352. n file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords 4 16 LINE COMMANDS Example Console config line tpassword 0 secret Console config line Related Commands login 4 15 password thresh 4 19 timeout login response This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax timeout login response seconds no timeout login response seconds Integer that specifies the timeout interval Range 0 300 seconds 0 disabled Default Setting e CLI Disabled 0 seconds e Telnet 600 seconds Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Ifa login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line timeout login response 120 Console config line 4 17 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE exec timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the number of seconds Range 0
353. n of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree which include this port Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto detection as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3 153 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3 153 1 e true or false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received indicating that another bridge is attached to this port Port Role Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge i e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge e designated port or is the MSTI regional root i e master port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges bridge ports or LANs fail or are removed The role is set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree Alternate port receives more 7 ES R Root Port useful BPDUs from another A Alternate Port bridge and is therefore not D Designated Port selected as the designated Aa B Backup Port port R SR A j JD B x o SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same
354. n older product in its product line with one that incorporates these newer technologies At that point the obsolete product is discontinued and is no longer an Active SMC product A list of discontinued products with their respective dates of discontinuance can be found at http www smc com index cfm action customer_setvice_warranty All products that are replaced become the property of SMC Replacement products may be either new or reconditioned Any replaced or repaired product carries either a 30 day limited warranty or the remainder of the initial warranty whichever is longer SMC is not responsible for any custom software or firmware configuration information or memory data of Customer contained in stored on or integrated with any products returned to SMC pursuant to any warranty Products returned to SMC should have any customer installed accessory or add on components such as expansion modules removed prior to returning the product for replacement SMC is not responsible for these items if they are returned with the product Customers must contact SMC for a Return Material Authorization number prior to returning any product to SMC Proof of purchase may be required Any product returned to SMC without a valid Return Material Authorization RMA number clearly marked on the outside of the package will be returned to customer at customer s expense For warranty claims within North America please call our toll free customer support nu
355. n the manufacturer s implementation However note that the static trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel compatible e To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure you add a static trunk via the configuration interface active links statically configured before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Trunk ID Port New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Trunk Trunk identifier Range 1 32 Unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Port Port identifier Range 1 24 48 3 109 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 110 Web Click Port Trunk Membership Enter a trunk ID of 1 32 in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Membership Member List Current New Trunk Unitl Port9 Trunk1 Unitl Port10 cagao Maa Remove pre E Pon im Figure 3 51 Static Trunk Configuration PORT CONFIGURATION CLI This example creates trunk 2 with ports 9 and 10 Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config Htinterface port channel 2 4 174 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 9 4
356. nd Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 24 GENERAL COMMANDS Example To show all lines enter this command Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times nteractive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate auto Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times nteractive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console General Commands Table 4 6 General Commands Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 4 26 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4 27 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4 27 show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 4 28 reload Restarts the system PE 4 29 end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any 4 29 config mode exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or any 4 30 exits the CLI quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 4 30 help Shows how to use help any NA Shows options for command completion any NA context sensitive 4 25 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode additional commands are available and certain commands display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 7 Syntax enable eve level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined p
357. ndows keys 1 When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000 make sure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in HyperTerminal s VT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs 2 Refer to Line Commands on page 4 13 for a complete description of console configuration options 3 Once you have set up the terminal correctly the console login screen will be displayed 2 3 INITIAL CONFIGURATION For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 4 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 4 11 Remote Connections 2 4 Prior to accessing the switch s onboard agent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol The IP address for this switch is assigned via DHCP by default To manually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP see Setting an IP Address on page 2 10 Notes 1 This switch supports four concurrent Telnet sessions 2 Each VLAN group can be assigned its own IP interface address page 2 10 You can manage the stack via any IP interface in the stack In other words the Master unit does not
358. nection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 300 Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local 2 CLI only 3 31 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click System Line Telnet Specify the connection parameters for Telnet access then click Apply Telnet Telnet Status v Enabled Telnet Port Number 23 Login Timeout 0 300 soo secs Exec Timeout 0 65535 feo secs Password Threshold Cif 0 Disabled Figure 3 14 Configuring t
359. nections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name in the static table or via information returned from a name server a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device 3 213 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Field Attributes Host Name Name of a host device that is mapped to one or more IP addresses Range 1 64 characters IP Address Internet address es associated with a host name Range 1 8 addresses e Alias Displays the host names that are mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry Web Select DNS Static Host Table Enter a host name and one or more corresponding addresses then click Apply Static Host Table Host Name IP Address Alias rd5 10 10 55 rd6 Delete 192 168 1 55 paes Add Static Host Host Name IP Address 1 IP Address 2 f IP Address 3 IP Address 4 IP Address 5 IP Address 6 IP Address 7 IP Address 8 Adal Figure 3 99 DNS Static Host Table 3 214 CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE CLI This example maps two address to a host name and then configures an alias host name for the same addresses Console config tip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 4 164 Console config H tip host rd6 10 1 0 55 Console config exit Console show host 4 170 Hostname rd5 Inet address 192 168
360. net Mask Subnet mask for source or destination address See the description for SubMask on page 3 89 Service Type Packet priority settings based on the following criteria Precedence IP precedence level Range 0 8 TOS Type of Service level Range 0 16 DSCP DSCP priority level Range 0 64 Protocol Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP UDP or Others where others indicates a specific protocol number 0 255 Options TCP UDP Others Default TCP Source Destination Port Source destination port number for the specified protocol type Range 0 65535 Source Destination Port Bit mask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 Control Code Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 Control Code Bit Mask Decimal number representing the code bits to match The control bitmask is a decimal number for an equivalent binary bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag
361. nfig line tpassword 0 secret 4 16 Console config line tttimeout login response 0 4 17 Console config line exec timeout 0 4 18 Console config line password thresh 5 4 19 Console config line silent time 60 4 20 Console config line databits 8 4 20 Console config line parity none 4 21 Console config line speed auto 4 22 Console config line stopbits 1 4 23 Console config line end Console show line 4 24 Console configuration Password threshold 5 times Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time 60 sec Baudrate auto Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console 3 30 BASIC CONFIGURATION Telnet Settings You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet i e a virtual terminal Management access via Telnet can be enabled disabled and other various parameters set including the TCP port number timeouts and a password These parameters can be configured via the Web or CLI interface Command Attributes Telnet Status Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch Default Enabled Telnet Port Number Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch Default 23 Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the con
362. ngle Host Force Authorized 2 i Enable 2 fo 3600 po Pe 6 Disabled Single Host ForceAimnorized 2 I Enable fe eo 3600 o ras 7 Disabled Single Host Force Authorized E MT Enable 2 fo 5600 Ro ppp 3 Figure 3 38 802 1X Port Configuration 3 81 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 82 CLI This example sets the authentication mode to enable 802 1X on port 2 and allows up to ten clients to connect to this port 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 1 2 reauth enabled Enable reauth period 5 quiet period 40 tx period 40 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 5 Status Authorized Operation mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 e0 29 94 34 65 Current Identifier 7 Authenticator State Machine State Reauth Count Backend State Machine State Request Count Identifier Server Authenticated 0 Idle 0 6 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize 802 1X is disabled on port 1 48 Console Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 2 4 174 Console config if dot1x port control auto 4 106 Console config if dot1ix re authentication 4 108 Console config if Htdotlx max req 5 4 106 Console config if dot1lx timeout quiet period 40 4 109 Console config if dot1lx timeout re authperiod 5 4 109 Console config if dot1lx timeout tx period 40 4 110 Console config if
363. not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports GL Ros Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 6 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports 7 Ifno explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all 4 115 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Masks for Access Control Lists You must specify optional masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types i e Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Table 4 33 Access Control List Commands Command Groups Function Page IP ACLs Configure ACLs based on IP addresses TCP 4 116 UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code MAC ACLs Configure ACLs based on hardware addresses 4 133 packet format
364. ns e Speed Duplex Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode i e with auto negotiation disabled Flow Control Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control 3 105 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 106 Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled you can force the settings for speed mode and flow control The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps hal duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Default Autonegotiation enabled Advertised capabilities for RJ 45 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full SFP 1000BASE SX LX ZX 1000full Media Type Shows the forced preferred port type to use for the combination ports 21 24 45 48 Default SFP Preferred Auto Copper Forced Always uses the built in RJ 45 port SFP Forced Always uses the SFP port even if module is not installed SFP Preferred Auto Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To create trunks and select port members
365. ntax sntp server 1 7p2 ip 3 ip IP address of an time server NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None 4 71 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console Related Commands Related Commands 4 71 sntp poll 4 72 show sntp 4 73 sntp poll 4 72 This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds Interval between time requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config sntp poll 60 Console SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Related Commands Related Commands 4 71 show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used fo
366. nterface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail e The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports wee N Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 6 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports 7 If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Setting the ACL Name and Type Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL Command Attributes Name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e Type There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code
367. o a Standard IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source Use the no form to remove a tule Syntax no permit deny any source bitmask host source any Any source IP address e source Source IP address e bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match e host Keyword followed by a specific IP address 4 118 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Default Setting None Command Mode Standard ACL Command Usage e New rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Example This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Related Commands access list ip 4 117 4 119 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE permit deny Extended ACL This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets with speci
368. o a VLAN for the current interface Use the no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface Syntax protocol vlan protocol group group id vlan vlan 1d no protocol vlan protocol group group id vlan group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e vlan id VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4093 Default Setting No protocol groups are mapped for any interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces via this command If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands such as vlan on page 4 237 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN e When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner Ifthe frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames Ifthe frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN Ifthe frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface 4 251 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protoco
369. o file Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server File Type Specify opcode operational code to copy firmware File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 6699 CE 99 Ce 99 a E ae Source Destination Unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted BASIC CONFIGURATION Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file Web Click System File Management Copy Operation Select tftp to file as the file transfer method enter the IP address of the TFTP server set the file type to opcode enter the file name of the software to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply If you replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using th
370. o the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group LAG Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel admin key matches if configured Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed 1 e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group e Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Htlacp actor admin key 120 Console config 1f 4 198 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS lacp admin key Port Channel This command configures a port channel s LACP administration key string Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp admin key key no lacp admin key key The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group LAG during local LACP setup on thi
371. ommand to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one snmp server enable traps command and the snmp server host command for that host must be enabled Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp server enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled The switch can send SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP address depending on the SNMP version that the management station supports If the snmp server host command does not specify the SNMP version the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the community string is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use the V3 auth or priv options the user name must first be defined with the snmp server user command Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host However if you specify a V3 host with the noauth option an SNMP user account will be generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host SNMP COMMANDS Example Console config Hsnmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman Console config Related Commands snmp server enable traps 4 153 snmp server enable traps This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps SNMP notifications Use the no form to disabl
372. on USER AUTHENTICATION CLI This example shows the default global settings for 802 1X Console show dot1x 4 110 Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control disabled 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized yes 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 47 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 48 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is disabled on port 1 48 Console Configuring 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol includes port authentication The 802 1X protocol must be enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control Sets the global setting for 802 1X default Disabled Web Select Security 802 1X Configuration Enable dot1X globally for the switch and click Apply 802 1X Configuration 802 1X System Authentication Control Y Enabled Figure 3 37 802 1X Configuration 3 79 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example enables 802 1X globally for the switch Console config dot1ix system auth control 4 108 Console config Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X When 802 1X is enabled you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client iden
373. onfigures trunk settings for a specified 3 162 MST instance VLAN 3 164 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enables GVRP VLAN registration 3 168 protocol Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type 3 168 supported by this switch Current Table Shows the current port members of each 3 169 VLAN and whether or not the port is tagged or untagged Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3 171 Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3 173 Static Membership Configures membership type for interfaces 3 175 including tagged untagged or forbidden Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN 3 177 attributes Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN 3 177 attributes 3 9 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 10 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Private VLAN Status Enables or disables the private VLAN 3 181 Link Status Configures the private VLAN 3 181 Protocol VLAN Configuration Creates a protocol group specifying the 3 183 supported protocols Port Configuration Maps a protocol group to a VLAN 3 184 Priority 3 186 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3 186 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3 186 Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output 3 188 queues Traffic Classes Status Enables disables traffic class priorities not NA implemented
374. ons 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 227208 Packets 3338 Broadcast pkts 263 Multi cast pkts 3064 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 3150 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 139 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 49 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 0 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 0 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 0 Console 4 185 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show interfaces switchport This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport nterface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 24 Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 24 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second LACP status Disabled Ingress rate limit Disable 1000M bits per second Egress rate limit Disable 1000M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule
375. onsole config ip telnet server port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax no ip telnet server port port number port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip telnet server port 123 Console config Secure Shell Commands 4 44 The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as r ogin remote login rsh remote shell and rep remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch uses a public key that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered This section describes the commands used to configure
376. onsole ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Enabling SNMP Management Access 2 12 The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as SMC EliteView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP traps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers without being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred BASIC CONFIGURATION The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1 2c and 3 clients To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients you must specify a community string The switch provides a default MIB View i e an SNMP v3 construct for the default public community string that provides read access to the entire MIB tree and a default view for the private community string that provides read write access to the entire MIB tree However you may assign new v
377. ontrol Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 21 Console config if media type copper forced 4 179 Console config if Creating Trunk Groups You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual ageregate link A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two devices i e single switch or a stack You can create up to 32 trunks 3 107 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 108 The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure any number of ports on the switch as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them If an LACP trunk consists of more than eight ports all other ports will be placed in a standby mode Should one link in the trunk fail one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide re
378. ooooccccocoommmm 3 52 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 60 0 eee eee 3 54 Setting SNMPv3 Views 0 cee eee 3 56 User Authentication A on cite Bean ae ait Bel ean na 3 58 Configuring User Accounts 6 0 cece eee eee 3 59 iv CONTENTS Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 3 60 Contiourino ATERS atado Ji ado ga Ei at 3 65 Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate 3 66 Configuring the Secure Shell o oooooooommooooooo o 3 67 Generating the Host Key Pait 0 0000005 3 70 Configuring the SSH Server 0 0 0 0 rnnr 3 72 Configuring Port Security 0 cece cee eee 3 74 Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication 00 3 76 Displaying 802 1X Global Settings oooooo ooooo 3 78 Configuring 802 1X Global Settings oooo 3 79 Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X oo 3 80 Displaying 802 1X Statistics 6 cece eee eee 3 83 Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access 3 85 ACCESS Control ist ts It aon ele aca ath 3 87 Configuring Access Control Lists o oooooooommmmo o 3 87 Setting the ACL Name and Type 000 3 88 Configuring a Standard IP ACL 0 000 3 89 Configuring an Extended IP ACL 00 3 90 Configuring a MAC ACL 6 cee eee 3 93 Configuring ACL Masks ooooocooooooccccccc eee 3 95 Specifying the Mask Type 0 eee c eee 3 95 Configuring an IP ACL Mask
379. oot Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 4096 2 0000E9313131 Current root port 0 Current root cost 0 Number of topology changes 0 Last topology changes time sec Transmission limit Path Cost Method Eth 1 7 information Admin status enabled Role master State forwarding External path cost 10000 Internal path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 7 Designated root 4096 2 0000E9313131 Designated bridge 4096 2 0000E9313131 Fast forwarding enable Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port enable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enable 3 159 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example sets the priority for MSTI 1 and adds VLANs 1 5 to this MSTI Console config spanning tree mst configuration 4 219 Console config mstp imst 1 priority 4096 4 221 Console config mstp imst 1 vlan 1 5 4 219 Console config mstp Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance Field Attributes MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 Note The other attributes are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 149 Web Click Sp
380. or for the host show users Shows SSH users including privilege level PE 4 81 The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or viaa RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified by the authentication login command on page 4 92 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair Use the ip ssh crypto host key generate command to create a host public private key pair 2 Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS 10 1 0 54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254 1502024559319986854435836165199992332978
381. or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax no capabilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric e 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation flowcontrol Supports flow control symmetric Gigabit only When specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames Default Setting e 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full e 1000BASE SX LX ZX 1000full Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 177 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands Example The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half 100full and flow control Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Htcapabilities 100half Console config if Hcapabilit
382. ord for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 4 Type username admin password 0 password for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Username admin Password CLI session with the SMC8748M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure Console config username guest password 0 password Console config username admin password 0 password Console config 2 9 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Setting an IP Address 2 10 You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch you will also need to specify the default gateway router Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network Manual Configuration You can manually assign an IP address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations on another network segment Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Note The IP address for this switch is obtained
383. ot forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses The rules defining port status are A porton a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding Iftwo ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree 3 149 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 150 Designated Port The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Oper Path Cost The contributio
384. ou need to first create a view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write assign the view to a group and then assign the user to a group The following example creates one view called mib 2 that includes the entire BASIC CONFIGURATION MIB 2 tree branch and then another view that includes the IEEE 802 1D bridge MIB It assigns these respective read and read write views to a group called r amp d and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA In the last step it assigns a v3 user to this group indicating that MD5 will be used for authentication provides the password greenpeace for authentication and the password einstein for encryption Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included Console config snmp server view 802 1d 1 3 6 2 1 17 included Console config Hsnmp server group r amp d v3 auth read mib 2 write 802 1d Console config snmp server user steve r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstein Console config For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from SNMP v3 clients refer to Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 45 or refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on page 4 146 Saving Configuration Settings Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage
385. ow map ip Shows the IP precedence map PE 4 274 precedence show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4 275 show map access list Shows CoS value mapped to an access list PE 4 130 ip for an interface show map access list Shows CoS value mapped to an access list PE 4 143 mac for an interface 4 267 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE map ip port Global Configuration This command enables IP port mapping i e class of service mapping for TCP UDP sockets Use the no form to disable IP port mapping Syntax no map ip port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority Example The following example shows how to enable TCP UDP port mapping globally Console config map ip port Console config map ip port Interface Configuration Use this command to set IP port priority i e TCP UDP port priority Use the no form to remove a specific setting Syntax map ip port port number cos cos value no map ip port port number port number 16 bit TCP UDP port number Range 0 65535 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting None 4 268 PRIORITY COMMANDS Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default sw
386. ow this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic Automatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters VLAN CONFIGURATION Status Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Ports Channel groups Shows the VLAN interface members CLI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 4 246 VLAN ID de Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S o Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Eth1 25 S Eth1 26 S Eth1 27 S Eth1 28 S Eth1 29 S AROS Eth1 31 S Eth1 32 S Eth1 33 S Eth1 34 S Eth1 35 S Eth1 36 S Eth1 37 S Eth1 38 S Eth1 39 S Eth1 40 S Eth1 41 S Eth1 42 S Eth1 43 S Eth1 44 S Eth1 45 S Eth1 46 S Eth1 47 S Eth1 48 S AEE Console Creating VLANs Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes e Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can
387. oximate round trip times Minimum 0 ms Maximum 10 ms Average 8 ms Console Related Commands interface 4 174 4 293 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 294 APPENDIX SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS Software Features Authentication Local RADIUS TACACS Port 802 1X HTTPS SSH Port Security Access Control Lists IP MAC up to 32 lists DHCP Client DNS Server Port Configuration 1000BASE T 10 100 Mbps at half full duplex 1000 Mbps at full duplex 1000BASE SX LX 1000 Mbps at full duplex SFP 1000BASE ZX 1000 Mbps at full duplex SFP Flow Control Full Duplex IEEE 802 3x Half Duplex Back pressure Broadcast Storm Control Traffic throttled above a critical threshold Port Mirroring Multiple source ports one destination port Rate Limits Input Limit Output limit Range configured per port A 1 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS Port Trunking Static trunks Cisco EtherChannel compliant Dynamic trunks Link Aggregation Control Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s VLAN Support Up to 255 groups port based protocol based or tagged 802 1Q GVRP for automatic VLAN learning private VLANs Class of Service Supports eight levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing which can be configured by VLAN tag or port Layer 3 4 priority mapping IP Prec
388. pecifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s web interface Default Port 443 Web Click Security HTTPS Settings Enable HTTPS and specify the port number then click Apply HTTPS Settings HTTPS Status Enabled z Change HTTPS Port Number 1 65535 441 Figure 3 32 HTTPS Settings CLI This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number Console config ip http secure server 4 41 Console config tip http secure port 441 4 42 Console config Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS for secure access a Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate appears for the switch By default the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secute you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized certification authority USER AUTHENTICATION Note For maximum security we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased When you h
389. ple typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands 4 4 You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the gt character to list keywords or parametets Showing Commands ENTERING COMMANDS If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL Interface Line VLAN Database or MSTP You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list of possible show commands Console show access group access list bridge ext calendar dns dotlx garp gvrp history hosts interfaces ip lacp line log logging mac mac address table management map marking port protocol vlan public key pvlan queue radius server running config snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system tacacs server users version vlan Console show Access groups Access lists Bridge extension information Date and time information DNS information 802 1X content GARP properties GVRP interface information History information Host information Interface information IP information LACP statistics TTY line information Login records Login setting MAC access lis
390. privilege level must be configured on the authentication setvet 3 61 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 62 You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select 1 RADIUS 2 TACACS and 3 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted using the TACACS server and finally the local user name and password is checked Command Attributes Authentication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only TACACS User authentication is performed using a TACACS server only authentication sequence User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the indicated sequence RADIUS Settings Global Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings ServerIndex specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers The process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user Server IP Address Addtess of authentication server Default 10 1 0 1 Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 De
391. pt Page Line line console vty Console config line 4 13 Access access list ip standard Console config std acl 4 114 Control access list ip extended Console config ext acl List access list ip mask precedence Console config ip mask acl access list mac Console config mac acl access list mac mask precedence Console config mac mask acl Interface interface ethernet port port channel d vlan id Console config if 4 173 VLAN vlan database Console config vlan 4 235 MSTP _ spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp 4 219 4 9 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if exit Console config Command Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line processing Table 4 3 Keystroke Commands Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctrl B Shifts
392. pts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line Related Commands silent time 4 20 4 19 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE silent time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration Example To set the silent time to 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Commands password thresh 4 19 databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax databits 7 8 no databits e 7 Seven data bits per character 8 Eight data bits per character 4 20 LINE COMMANDS Default Setting 8 data bits per character Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is r
393. r IC 4 239 a specified VLAN switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode IC 4 240 for an interface switchport Configures frame types to be accepted IC 4 241 acceptable frame types by an interface switchport Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4 242 ingress filtering switchport native vlan Configures the PVID native VLAN of IC 4 243 an interface switchport allowed Configures the VLANs associated with IC 4 244 vlan an interface switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 256 switchport forbidden Configures forbidden VLANs for an IC 4 245 vlan interface switchport priority Sets a port priority for incoming IC 4 260 4 238 VLAN COMMANDS interface vlan This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface Syntax interface vlan v an id vlan id YD of the configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands shutdown 4 180 4 239 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore
394. r sending time synchronization requests and the current SNTP mode i e unicast Example Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 05 13 28 2002 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console clock timezone This command sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before utc after utc name Name of timezone usually an acronym Range 1 29 characters bours Number of hours before after UTC Range 1 13 hours minutes Number of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes before utc Sets the local time zone before east of UTC after utc Sets the local time zone after west of UTC 4 73 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 4 73 calendar set 4 74 This command sets the
395. r 3 4 Priority Settings 0 eee eee 3 192 Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values 3 192 vi CONTENTS Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority 3 193 Mapping IP Precedence 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 193 Mapping DSCP Priority srun eee eee 3 195 Mapping IP Port Priority 2 0 0 0 eee eee 3 197 Mapping CoS Values to ACLs 1 0 0 0 000 0 c ee eee 3 199 Multicast Filtering ii ne ideals bs a ahah se Monee Sale 3 201 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 000005 3 202 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters 3 202 Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3 205 Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router 3 206 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3 207 Assigning Ports to Multicast Services oooo o 3 208 Configuring Domain Name Service 6 6 c cee eee ee 3 210 Configuring General DNS Server Parameters 3 210 Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries 3 213 Displaying the DNS Cache 0 0 0 3 215 Command Line Interface oooooooooom o 4 1 Using the Command Line Interface 0 eee eee eee 4 1 Accessing the Ella a Sagas faa tage Bde seo 4 1 Console ConnecttOn saysa n ee A daa 4 1 Telnet Connection ins a Slaves ta FR eae een 4 2 Entering Commands esama 4 8 a wee a 4 3 Keywords and Arguments 0 0 cc eee ce cece eee 4 3 Minimum Abbreviation 0 0 0 0 cece ee ee
396. r MAC i e Layer 2 information Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number IP Precedence bit or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Glossary 1 GLOSSARY Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol
397. r a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm the new setting The following table summarizes the web page configuration buttons Table 3 1 Web Page Configuration Buttons Button Action Apply Sets specified values to the system Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply or Apply Changes Help Links directly to web help Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure that Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu Tools Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button Panel Display 3 4 The web agent displays an image of the switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Active i e up or down Duplex i e half or full duplex or Flow Control 1 e with or without flow control Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3 105 Unit 1 Mode Active a B Unk upi Link Down Figure 3 2 Panel Display NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Main Menu Using the onboa
398. r a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset Example The following example clears statistics on port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Console 4 182 INTEREACE COMMANDS show interfaces status This command displays the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status n erface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 port channel channe id Range 1 32 e vlan vian id Range 1 4093 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 3 102 4 183 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Broadcast storm limit Information of VLAN 1 MAC address Console Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 Port type 1000T Mac address 00 30 F1 D4 73 A5 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half Broadcast storm Enabled 500 packets second Flow control
399. r changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be ageregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 3 119 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port LACP Port Internal Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Internal Information Member Pon z Trunk ID ILACP System Priority ILACP Port Priority Admin Key Oper Key LACPDUS Interval secs 30 seconds Admin State Expired Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing Oper State Distributing Admin State Collecting Oper State Collecting
400. r management access However if the unit to which you normally connect for management access fails and there are no active port members on the other units within this VLAN interface then this IP address will no longer be available To retain a constant IP address for management access across fail over events you should include port members on several units within the primary VLAN used for stack management 2 7 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Resilient Configuration If a unit in the stack fails the unit numbers will not change This means that when you replace a unit in the stack the original configuration for the failed unit will be restored to the replacement unit This applies to both the Master and Slave units Renumbering the Stack The startup configuration file maps configuration settings to each switch in the stack based on the unit identification number If the units are no longer numbered sequentially after several topology changes or failures you can reset the unit numbers using the Renumbering command in the web interface or CLI Just remember to save the new configuration settings to a startup configuration file prior to powering off the stack Master Basic Configuration Console Connection 2 8 The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available
401. ral Configuration mode 4 249 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the protocol vlan protocol group command Interface Configuration mode protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups This command creates a protocol group adds specific protocols to a group Use the no form to remove a protocol group Syntax protocol vlan protocol group group id add remove frame_type frame protocol type protocol no protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e frame Frame type used by this protocol Options ethernet rfc_1042 llc_other protocol Protocol type The only option for the llc_other frame type is ipx_raw The options for all other frames types include ip arp tarp Default Setting No protocol groups are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following creates protocol group 1 and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip Console config Hprotocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config 17 SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations 4 250 VLAN COMMANDS protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces This command maps a protocol group t
402. rd devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets Table 4 61 Protocol based VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page protocol vlan Create a protocol group specifying the GC 4 250 protocol group supported protocols protocol vlan Maps a protocol group to a VLAN IC 4 251 protocol group show protocol vlan Shows the configuration of protocol PE 4 252 protocol group groups show interfaces Shows the interfaces mapped to a PE 4 253 protocol vlan protocol group and the corresponding protocol group VLAN To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 4 237 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the protocol vlan protocol group command Gene
403. rd web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page System 3 12 System Information Provides basic system description including 3 12 contact information Switch Information Shows the number of ports hardware 3 14 firmware version numbers and power status Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 3 16 IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3 18 File Management 3 23 Copy Operation Allows the transfer and copying of files 3 23 Delete Allows deletion of files from the flash 3 24 memory Set Startup Set the startup file 3 27 Line 3 28 Console Sets console port connection parameters 3 28 Telnet Sets Telnet connection parameters 3 31 Log 3 33 Logs Sends error messages to a logging process 3 33 System Logs Stores and displays error messages 3 33 Remote Logs Configures the logging of messages to a 3 35 remote logging process SMTP Sends an SMTP client message to a remote 3 37 logging process Renumbering Renumbers the units in the stack 3 40 3 5 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 6 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Reset Restarts the switch 3 41 SNTP 3
404. rent IP subnet For example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached After you configure the switch with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access ENTERING COMMANDS 2 At the prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty prompt for the administrator to show that you are play promp y using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Vty 1 gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode i e Normal Exec where indicates the number of the current Telnet session 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with the SMC8748M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Vty 0 Note You can op
405. response time 4 283 ip igmp snooping query interval 4 282 This command configures the query interval Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query interval seconds no ip igmp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snooping query max response time This command configures the query report delay Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 25 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the mu
406. ress and end address Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses Console config management all client 192 168 1 19 Console config management all client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console config show management This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Syntax 4 38 show management all client http client snmp client telnet client e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the web group e snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show management all client Management IP Filter HTTP Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 Zee 192 168 21 325 192 168 1 30 SNMP Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 Z 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 TELNET Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 Zi 1921681 25 192 168 1 30 Console Web Server Commands Table 4 12 Web Server Command Command Function Mode Page ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web GC 4 40 browser interface ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or GC 4
407. ress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console show access group This command shows the port assignments of ACLs Command Mode Privileged Executive Example Console show access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP standard access list david MAC access list jerry Console 4 145 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE SNMP Commands 4 146 Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to trap managers SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree To use these commands first configure an SNMP engine ID specify read and write access views for the MIB tree configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy and then assign SNMP users to these groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Table 4 39 SNMP Commands Command Function Mode Page snmp setver Enables the SNMP agent GC 4 147 show snmp Displays the status of SNMP NE 4 148 communications PE snmp server Sets up the community access string to GC 4 149 community permit access to SNMP commands snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC
408. ributes Basic Configuration of Global Settings Spanning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STA Spanning Tree Algorithm IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set to STA forced compatibility mode RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w RSTP is the default MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority Default 32768 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Default 2 Minimum 1 Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 3 145 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 146 Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration mes
409. riod 0 0 0 0 eee 4 109 dot1x timeout tx petiod 0 06 eee eee ee 4 110 show doth x jig Sel haga etal ci Gate 4 110 Access Control List Commands 000 000 c cee cece eee 4 114 TRACE aos o Mint che ate Beat ARREA 4 116 access litio ica it sica 4 117 permit deny Standard ACL 0 eee eee eee 4 118 permit deny Extended ACL 0000 4 120 show ip access list 6 6 esae ena eee eee 4 122 access list ip mask precedence 0 0 0000 4 123 mask R AC a ado tills 4 124 show access list ip mask precedence 4 127 Ip ACEESS OTOUP sik eee Ab 4 128 show ip ACCESS QLOUP 2 eee eee 4 129 map access list Ip eee ee eee 4 129 show map access list ip 6 6 eee 4 130 Mateh access HSt IP nnes Poses ee a eda ali 4 131 show A eed ts enna eee 4 132 MAG ACTS te A O Ae 4 133 ACCESS SEMA vai its eRe ce Ao eed 4 134 permit deny MAC ACL 0 0 eee eee 4 135 show mac access list 2 0 eee eee 4 137 access list mac mask precedence ooooooooooooo 4 137 mask MAC ACI c sid Sac na ia po it 4 138 show access list mac mask precedence 4 140 IMACACCESS OTOUP estos to ae aa 4 141 show mac ACCESS QTOUP 6 eee eee eee 4 141 map access list MAC ee eee eee 4 142 show map access list mac 6 eee eee 4 143 match access list Mac 6 eee eee 4 144 xi CONTENTS ACE Information a a 4 show access list ooooooooooommoooc or cee eee ee 4 show aCC Ss G
410. rivilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode Default Setting Level 15 Command Mode Normal Exec Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password see the enable password command on page 4 36 e The character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 4 27 enable password 4 36 4 26 GENERAL COMMANDS disable This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privileged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 4 26 configure This command activates Global Configuration mode You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including In
411. roadcast threshold Enabled 600 packets second Lacp status Disabled Ingress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second Egress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console 3 124 PORT CONFIGURATION Configuring Port Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time i i laa analysis You can then attach a logic 5 AP A AT analyzer or RMON probe to the target ene Ge port and study the traffic crossing the port source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Command Usage e Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the soutce port Command Attributes e Mirror Sessions Displays a list of current mirror sessions e Source Unit The unit whose port traffic will be monitored Range 1 8 e Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored Range 1 24 48 e Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive Tx transmit or Both Target Unit The unit whose port will
412. root State forwarding External admin path cost 10000 Internal admin path cost 10000 External oper path cost 0000 Internal oper path cost 0000 Priority 28 Designated cost 0 Designated port 28 1 Designated root 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Designated bridge 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled Console 4 234 VLAN COMMANDS show spanning tree mst configuration This command shows the multiple spanning tree configuration Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show spanning tree mst configuration Mstp Configuration Information Configuration name XSTP REGION 0 Revision level 0 Instance Vlans Console VLAN Commands A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Table 4 56 VLAN Commands Command Groups Function Page Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and 4 236 state Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters 4 238 Interfaces including ingress and egress tagging mode ingress filtering PVID an
413. rotocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table 3 121 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 122 Web Click Port LACP Port Neighbors Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Neighbors Information Member Port Trunk ID Partner Admin Systern ID Partner Oper System ID Partner Admin Port Number Partner Oper Port Number Port Admin Priority Pont Oper Priority Admin Key Oper Key Admin State Expired Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing Oper State Distributing Admin State Collecting Oper State Collecting Admin State Oper State Synchronization _ i Synchronization Admin State Aggregation Oper State Aggregation fi Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP
414. rrent firmware release e RAM Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s temporary RAM memoty for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 7 is specified all messages from level O to level 7 will be logged to RAM Range 0 7 Default 7 Note The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level Web Click System Log System Logs Specify System Log Status set the level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory then click Apply System Logs System Log Status Enabled 3 Flash Level 0 7 Ram Level 0 7 Figure 3 15 System Logs BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory Use the show logging command to display the current settings Console config logging on 4 57 Console config logging history ram 0 4 58 Console config Console show logging flash 4 62 Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level errors Console Remote Log Configuration The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages at or above a specified level Command Attributes Remote Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the remote logging process Default Disabled Logging Facili
415. rts standard STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802 1Q port based protocol based or private VLANs Traffic Default port priority traffic class map queue scheduling IP Prioritization Precedence or Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP and TCP UDP Port Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query Description of Software Features 1 2 The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port saturation Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Port based and protocol based VLANs plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering provides support for real time DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES network applications Some of the management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to restore the switch configuration settings Authentication This switch authenticates management access v a the console port Telnet or Web browser User
416. runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and Web management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 3 22 for more information e Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also known as POST Power On Self Test Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files However you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded MANAGING SYSTEM FILES Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file 2 17 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 18 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent Using a web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity The Web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface
417. rval between sending GC 4 97 authentication requests show radius server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4 98 4 94 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS radius server host This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication parameters that apply to each server Use the no form to restore the default values Syntax no radius server index host host_ip_address host_alias auth port auth_pord timeout imeoui retransmit retransmil key ke index Allows you to specific up to five servers These servers are queried in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires host_ip_address IP address of server host_alias Symbolic name of server Maximum length 20 characters e port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 e timeout Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 retransmit Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 key Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting e auth port 1812 e timeout 5 seconds e retransmit 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 20 port 181 timeout 10 retransmit 5 key green Console config 4
418. rver community private rw vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active interface vlan 1 ip address dhcp line console line vty end Console Related Commands show running config 4 77 show running config This command displays the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None 4 77 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 78 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Use this command in conjunction with the show startup config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by cy symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information SNMP community strings Users names access levels and encrypted passwords VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for the switch Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console show running config building running config please wait lt stackingDB gt 0000000000000000 lt stackingDB gt I lt stackingMac gt 01_00 30 f1 df 9c a0_00 lt stackingMac gt I lt stackingMac gt 00_00 00 0
419. rver host hostaddr community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv udp port por no snmp server host host addr host addr Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 trap destination IP address entries community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 32 characters version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 traps auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy port Host UDP port to use Range 1 65535 Default 162 4 151 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 152 Default Setting Host Address None SNMP Version 1 UDP Port 162 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you do not enter an snmp server host command no notifications are sent In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp server host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command Use the snmp server enable traps c
420. s an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session dot1x port control Sets dotlx mode for a port interface IC 4 106 dotlx operation mode Allows single or multiple hosts on a IC 4 107 dot1x port dot1x re authenticate Forces re authentication on specific PE 4 108 ports dot1x re authentication Enables re authentication for all ports IC 4 108 dot1x timeout Sets the time that a switch port waits IC 4 109 quiet period after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout Sets the time period after which a IC 4 109 re authperiod connected client must be re authenticated dot1x timeout tx period Sets the time period during an IC 4 110 authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4 110 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS dotlx system auth control This command enables IEEE 802 1X port authentication globally on the switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no dotlx system auth control Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dotlx system auth control Console config dot1x default This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values Syntax dot1lx default Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config Hdot1
421. s are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Configuring Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit tules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny tules the packet is accepted You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule This is done by specifying masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL Command Usage The following restrictions apply to ACLs Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20 You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule 3 87 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH When an ACL is bound to an i
422. s expires or the switch is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the switch In this case you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface You can only restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current address is still available CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart 4 289 Console 3 21 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Managing Firmware 3 22 You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version You must specify the method of file transfer along with the file type and file names as required Command Attributes File Transfer Method The firmware copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch file to unit Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack unit t
423. s for the switch 4 210 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port 4 235 membership for VLAN groups also enables or configures private VLANs and protocol VLANs GVRP and Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic 4 254 Priority Sets port priority for untagged frames selects strict priority or weighted round robin relative weight for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP UDP traffic types IP precedence and DSCP 4 259 Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query parameters and specifies ports attached to a multicast router 4 276 IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch 4 287 The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations ACL Access Control List Configuration GC Global Configuration IC Interface Configuration LC Line Configuration NE Normal Exec MST Multiple Spanning Tree PE Privileged Exec VC VLAN Database Configuration LINE COMMANDS Line Commands You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server s serial port These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual terminal Table 4 5 Line Command Syntax Command Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and GC 4 14 starts the line configurat
424. s of additional domain name servers Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The listed name servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response DNS CoMMANDS Example This example adds two domain name servers to the list and then displays the list Console config H tip name server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console Related Commands ip domain name 4 166 ip domain lookup 4 169 ip domain lookup This command enables DNS host name to address translation Use the no form to disable DNS Syntax no ip domain lookup Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Atleast one name server must be specified before you can enable DNS If all name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled 4 169 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show 4 170 Example This example enables DNS and then displays the configuration Console config tip domain lookup Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name Ssample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Consol
425. s switch Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Port Channel Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed Le it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Note that when the LAG is no longer used the port channel admin key is reset to 0 Example Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if Htlacp admin key 3 Console config if 4 199 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE lacp port priority This command configures LACP port priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner port priority priority no lacp actor partner port priority e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link priority LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority Ifan active port link goes down the backup port with the highest priority is selected to
426. s the current date and time setting NE 4 75 PE sntp client 4 70 This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax no sntp client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup e g 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 02 52 44 2002 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console Related Commands sntp client 4 70 sntp poll 4 72 show sntp 4 73 sntp server This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Sy
427. s to all ports on the switch Command Attributes Port Port number Trunk Trunk number Type Indicates the port type 1000BASE T or SFP Protect Status Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled Default Enabled Threshold Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth Options 500 262143 packets per second Default 500 3 123 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port Port Broadcast Control or Trunk Broadcast Control Check the Enabled box for any interface set the threshold and click Apply Port Broadcast Control Port Type Protect Status Threshold 500 262143 Trunk 1 tODOBase TX M Enable 500 packets sec 2 1000Base TX IM Enable Bo packets sec 3 1000Base TX WM Enable Bo packets sec 4 fioo0Base Tx M Enable Eo ai 5 1000Base Tx IM Enable oo packets sec x Figure 3 57 Port Broadcast Control CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1 and then sets broadcast suppression at 600 packets per second for port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 174 Console config if no switchport broadcast 4 181 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 4 181 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 2 4 186 Information of Eth 1 2 B
428. sages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN Ifitis a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states 1 e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 Configuration Settings for RS TP The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This is the default Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 SPANNING TRE
429. se the no form to clear the name Syntax name name name Name of the spanning tree Default Setting Switch s MAC address Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name and revision number page 4 222 are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp name R amp D Console config mstp Related Commands revision 4 222 revision This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree configuration of this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax revision number number Revision number of the spanning tree Range 0 65535 4 222 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting 0 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name page 4 222 and revision number are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp revision 1 Console config mstp Related Commands name 4 222 max hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded Use the no form to restore
430. see Creating Trunk Groups on page 3 107 Note Auto negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed Duplex Mode or Flow Control options PORT CONFIGURATION Web Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings and click Apply Port Configuration Port Name Admin Exerc Flow Control Autonegatiation forced Mode Trunk Enabled y R 10h M 100m F 10007 M sym f E Enable a tor Panor 10007 PF None Enabled F 10h M 100n F 10007 M sym None Enable a Riot aoo F 1000f Pre None 7 Enabled y 10h 100n F 1000n M sym 3 i Ena B Fio aoo F 10007 Mee None Enabled F 10h M 1001 M 1000n M sym None i noe al a T Por M1001 F 10007 M FC None z Enabled y M 10h M 100h F 1000n E Sym s Menin a tor aot 1000 MFC None s Figure 3 50 Port Port Configuration CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 13 4 174 Console config if description RD SW 13 4 174 Console config if shutdown 4 180 Console config if no shutdown Console config if no negotiation 4 176 Console config if speed duplex 100half 4 175 Console config if flowcontrol 4 178 Console config if negotiation Console config if capabilities 100half 4 177 Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowc
431. sers Authentication Settings Use remote authentication to configure access rights HTTPS Settings Provide a secure web connection SSH Settings Provide a secure shell for secure Telnet access e Port Security Configure secure addresses for individual ports e 802 1X Use IEEE 802 1X port authentication to control access to specific ports IP Filter Filters management access to the web SNMP or Telnet interface USER AUTHENTICATION Configuring User Accounts The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a safe place The default guest name is guest with the password guest The default administrator name is admin with the password admin Command Attributes e Account List Shows the list of users that are allowed management access Defaults admin and guest e New Account Displays configuration settings for a new account User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters maximum number of users 5 Access Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive e Change Password Sets a new password for the specified user 3 5
432. setting Syntax no management all client http client snmp client telnet client start address end address e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the web group e snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group e start address A single IP address or the starting address of a range e end address The end address of a range Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration 4 37 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start add
433. sh a valid network topology RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower legacy STA RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration 1 e around one tenth of the time required by STA by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs 3 139 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH When using STA or RSTP it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all VLAN members Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily isolate some of the group members MSTP an extension of RSTP is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups Once you specify the VLANs to include in a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTD the protocol will automatically build an MSTI tree to maintain connectivity among each of the VLANs MSTP maintains contact with the global network because each instance is treated as an RSTP node in the Common Spanning Tree CST Displaying Global Settings You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen Field Attributes Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier for this bridge
434. shold Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES IEEE 802 1D Bridge The switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this information The address table supports up to 16K addresses Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memoty before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the switch provides 1 MB for frame buffering This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Algorithm The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Algorithm STA IEEE 802 1D When there are multiple physical paths between segments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure th
435. side the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Web Click Security SSH Settings Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required then click Apply Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server SSH Server Settings SSH Server Status F Enabled Version 2 0 ss Authentication Timeout 1 120 100 seconds ssh Authentication Retries 1 5 5 ssh Server Key Size 612 896 512 Figure 3 34 SSH Server Settings 3 73 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example enables SSH sets the authentication parameters and displays the current configuration It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH and then disables this connection Console config ip ssh server 4 48 Console config ip ssh timeout 100 4 49 Console config ip ssh authentication retries 5 4 50 Console config ip ssh server key size 512 4 50 Console config end Console show ip ssh 4 54 SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation timeout 100 secs Authentication retries 5 Server key size 512 bits Console show ssh 4 54 Information of secure shell Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state 0 admin 2 0 cipher 3des session started Console disconnect 0 4 23 Console Configuring Port Security 3 74 Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a sw
436. sole config 4 271 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE map ip dscp Interface Configuration This command sets IP DSCP priority i e Differentiated Services Code Point priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp ds p value cos cos value no map ip dscp e dscp value 8 bit DSCP value Range 0 255 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 4 68 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 0 8 1 10 12 14 16 2 18 20 22 24 3 26 28 30 32 34 36 4 38 40 42 5 48 6 46 56 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces 4 272 PRIORITY COMMANDS Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Hmap ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config if show map ip port Use this com
437. splay description Continued Field Description LACPDUs Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU Internal information LACP System LACP system priority assigned to this port channel Priority LACP Port LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the Priority channel group Admin State Oper State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system consi
438. splays the rules for configured PE 4 137 MAC ACLs access list mac Accesses the mode for configuring GC 4 137 mask precedence access control masks mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL MAC Mask 4 138 rules show access list mac Shows the ingress or egress rule PE 4 140 mask precedence masks for MAC ACLs mac access group Adds a port to a MAC ACL IC 4 141 show mac Shows port assignments for MAC PE 4 141 access gtoup ACLs map access list mac Sets the CoS value and IC 4 142 corresponding output queue for packets matching an ACL rule show map access list Shows CoS value mapped to an PE 4 143 mac access list for an interface match access list mac Changes the 802 1p priority the IC 4 144 priority of a frame matching the defined rule i e also called packet marking show marking Displays the current configuration PE 4 132 for packet marking 4 133 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE access list mac This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list mac ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An egress ACL must contain all deny rules When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you mu
439. ssign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 1 Console config if Htqueue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 4 262 Console config if end Console show queue bandwidth 4 265 Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight 0 1 3 2 5 3 7 4 9 5 11 6 13 7 15 Information of Eth 1 2 Queue ID Weight Layer 3 4 Priority Settings 3 192 Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame using the priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP port If priority bits are used the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority IP Precedence ot DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION S
440. st add at least one tule to the list To remove a tule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list mac jerry Console config mac acl Related Commands permit deny 4 135 mac access group 4 141 show mac access list 4 137 4 134 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS permit deny MAC ACL This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address i e physical layer address or Ethernet protocol type Use the no form to remove a tule Syntax no permit deny any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask Note The default is for Ethernet II packets no permit deny tagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny untagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny tagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid wid vid bitmask no permit deny untagged
441. st services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 1 1 12 ethernet 1 12 4 277 Console config exit Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 279 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console Configuring Domain Name Service The Domain Naming System DNS service on this switch allows host names to be mapped to IP addresses using static table entries or by redirection to other name servers on the network When a client device designates this switch as a DNS server the client will attempt to resolve host names into IP addresses by forwarding DNS queries to the switch and waiting for a response You can manually configure entries in the DNS table used for mapping domain names to IP addresses configure default domain names or specify one or more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Configuring General DNS Server Parameters 3 210 Command Usage To enable DNS service on this switch first configure one or more name servers and then enable domain lookup status e To append domain names to incomplete host names received from a DNS client 1 e not formatted with dotted notation you can specify a default domain name or a list of domain names to be tried in sequential order If there is no domain list the default domain name is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is no
442. standard for various network applications are shown in the following table However you can map the priority levels to the switch s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network Table 3 12 CoS Priority Levels Priority Level Traffic Type 1 Background 2 Spate 0 default Best Effort 3 Excellent Effort 4 Controlled Load 5 6 7 Video less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter Network Control CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Command Attributes e Priority CoS value Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest priority Traffic Class Output queue buffer Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest CoS priority queue Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Assign priorities to the traffic classes i e output queues then click Apply Traffic Classes Priority Traffic Class o o 1 P 07 2 h on 3 B en 4 M on 5 E o7 6 b on 7 P on Figure 3 84 Traffic Classes CLI The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 174 Console config if queue cos map 0 0 4 263 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if end Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 4 266 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 012 Priority Queue 0 1 2 Console
443. startup config Copies the running config to the startup config running config to tftp Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server startup config to file Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch startup config to running config Copies the startup config to the running config startup config to tftp Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch tftp to running config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config tftp to startup config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config file to unit Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack unit to file Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch e TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Type Specify config configuration to copy configuration settings File Name The configuration file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters AZ a z 0 9 gt gt gt Source Destination Unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Note The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space 3 26 BASIC CONFIGURATION Downloading Con
444. stomizes the prompt used in PE and NE GC 4 32 mode hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4 33 samp server Sets the system contact string GC 4 150 contact samp server Sets the system location string GC 4 150 location switch Renumbers stack units PE 4 33 renumber prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt Use the no form to restore the default prompt Syntax prompt string no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting Console Command Mode Global Configuration 4 32 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console config prompt RD2 RD2 config hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config hostname RD 1 Console config switch renumber This command resets the switch unit identification numbers in the stack All stack members are numbered sequentially starting from the top unit for a non loop stack or starting from the Master unit for a looped stack Syntax switch all renumber Default Setting For non loop stacking the top unit is unit 1 e For loop stacking the master unit is unit 1 Command Mode Global Con
445. sts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group MULTICAST FILTERING Command Usage e Static multicast addresses are never aged out When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command Attribute Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list WLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch e Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service e Unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Port List New Static IGMP Member Port Interf Pi hd VLAN 1 2241112 Unit Port1 puereso ez a VLAN ID 1 y lt lt Add Multicast IP po Remove Unit 1 y Port 1 Trunk Figure 3 97 IGMP Member Port Table 3 209 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multica
446. t Command Attributes Source Destination Address Type Use Any to match any addtess Host to specify the host address for a single node or MAC to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination Bit Mask Address of rule must match this bitmask VID Bit Mask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask Ethernet Type Bit Mask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask e Packet Format Bit Mask A packet format must be specified in the rule ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Web Configure the mask to match the required rules in the MAC ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a host address or an address range Use a bitmask to search for specific VLAN ID s or Ethernet type s Or check for rules where a packet format was specified Then click Add ACL Mask MAC Configuration Mask MAC Ingress Table Source Bit Mask Destination Bit Mask VID Bit Mask Ethernet Type Bit Mask Packet Format Mask Remove 00 11 11 11 11 11 Any 3 Enabled Remove Remove All Entries Source Address Type Any Source Bit Mask ffoo 00 00 00 00 00 Destination Address Type Any Destination Ba Mask ffoo 00 00 00 00 00 _ MO Bit Mask L Ethernet Type Bit Mask L Packet Format Mask I Enabled Lasa le Figure 3 47 Configuring a MAC based ACL 3 99 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example s
447. t Configuration of the address table Management IP filter Maps priority Configuration for packet marking Port characteristics Protocol VLAN information Public key information Private VLAN information Priority queue information RADIUS server information Information on the running configuration Simple Network Management Protocol statistics Simple Network Time Protocol configuration Spanning tree configuration Secure shell server connections Startup system configuration System information TACACS server settings Information about terminal lines System hardware and software versions Virtual LAN settings COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The command show interfaces will display the following information Console show interfaces counters Information of interfaces counters protocol vlan Protocol vlan information status Information of interfaces status switchport Information of interfaces switchport Console Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the CPEE S keywords starting with Console show s snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system Console show s Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the ef
448. t Disabled Disabled 3 Enabled Discarding 0 0 4096 0 0030F 1 DF 128 3 10000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 4 Enabled Discarding 0 0 4096 0 0030F 1DF 128 4 10000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 5 Enabled Discarding O 0 4096 0 0030F 1DF 185 10000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 6 Enabled Discarding 0 0 4096 0 0030F 1286 10000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 7 Enabled Discarding 0 0 4096 0 0030F 10F9CA0 128 7 10000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled B Enabled Discarding 0 0 4096 0 0030F1DFICAD 1238 10000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 9 Enabled Discarding 0 0 4096 O 0090F 1DF9CAD 128 450 10000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 2 a Figure 3 67 STA Port Information SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This example shows the STA attributes for port 5 Console show spanning tree ethernet 1 5 4 233 Eth 1 5 information Admin status enabled Role disable State discarding External admin path cost 10000 Internal admin path cost 10000 External oper path cost 10000 Internal oper path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 5 Designated root 4096 0 0030F1DF9CAO Designated bridge 4096 0 0030F1DF9CAO Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled Console Configuring Interface Se
449. t 1 25 IP standard access list david Console Related Commands ip access group 4 128 map access list ip This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping Syntax no map access list ip ac _name cos cos value acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters cos value CoS value Range 0 7 Default Setting None 4 129 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown in the following table For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues see queue cos map on 4 263 Table 4 35 Egress Queue Priority Mapping Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Example Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 25 Console config if map access list ip bill cos 0 Console config if Related Commands queue cos map 4 263 show map access list ip 4 130 show map access list ip This command shows the CoS value mapped to an IP ACL for the current interface The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule
450. t Internal Information 3 120 LACP Port Neighbors Information 3 122 Port Broadcast Control oooooomomoomomom o 3 124 Configuring a Mirror Port 0 0 cee ee eee 3 126 Rate Limit Configuration 1 1 0 0 0 0 00 c cece eee 3 127 Port Statistics so 3t ane eh cP ida 3 132 Port Statistics continued 000 0000 eee 3 133 Static Addresses 0 ccc cece eens 3 135 Dynamic Addresses 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 137 Mddtesse gino eee speech Ae ae deh ek 3 138 STA Information aa da ae bute Hak hades 3 143 STA Configuration 2 0 0 EE E ee eee 3 148 SPA Port Information vst vals bid added le abil 3 152 STA Port Configuration 00 e eee eee eee 3 156 MSTP VLAN Configuration ooooccccocommmm 3 158 MSTP Port Information 0000 e eee 3 160 xxi FIGURES xxii Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 Figure 3 87 Figure 3 88 Figure 3 89 Figure 3 90 Figure 3 91 Figure 3 92 Figure 3 93 Figure 3 94 Figure 3 95 Figure 3 96 Figure 3 97 Figure 3 98 Figure 3 99 Figure 3 100 MSTP Port Configuration oooococcccooonomo 3 163 Enabling GVRP Status 0 eee 3 168 VLAN Basic Information 0 0000 eee 3 169 VLAN Current Table litis 3 170 Creating Virtual LANs 0 0
451. t gateway 0 cece 4 290 show ip interface is vei id oc 4 291 show ip Teditects pio Mahan ae LG Ri E 4 291 PI A ao aso a ted See A es ty 4 292 Software Specifications 0 cece eee ee eee A 1 Software Featutes ita ee dea eda o das ee A 1 Management Features cia ones ea ee A 2 Standards saa sti Raut cue ida Rial ci adios Wipe Rides Beate ei eaten A 3 Management Information Bases 00060 c cece eee cece A 4 Troubleshooting siii dr e RRR B 1 Problems Accessing the Management Interface oooommmmm lt B 1 Using System Loos cil ii ici B 3 Glossary Index xvil Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab e 1 1 e 1 2 e 3 1 e 3 2 e 3 3 e 3 4 e 3 5 e 3 6 e 3 7 e 3 8 e 3 9 e 3 10 e 3 11 e 3 12 e 3 13 e 3 14 e 3 15 e 4 1 e 42 e 4 3 e 4 4 e 4 5 e 4 6 e 4 7 e 4 8 e 4 9 e 4 10 e 4 11 e412 e 4 13 e 4 14 e 4 15 e 4 16 Key Heatares sic shai A pete ee 1 1 System Defaults ve cyrs sase Vee heb ea ee ed ns 1 7 Web Page Configuration Buttons oooooooooooo 3 4 Matin Menu ii ld Sere a teed ER eee A 3 5 Logoing Levels ici oe i Ge 3 33 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels 3 46 FUT PS Support A A 3 65 8021X Statistics mi eS as 3 83 LAGER Port Counters ii 3 116 LACP Internal Configuration Information 3 118 LACP Neighbor Confi
452. t periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 At the interface configuration mode prompt use one of the following commands e To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt 2 11 INITIAL CONFIGURATION e To obtain IP settings via BOOTP type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt 3 Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 4 Type ip dhcp restart to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt 6 Then save your configuration changes by typing copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end C
453. t the order in which the ACL rules were entered e First create the required ACLs and inbound or outbound masks before mapping an ACL to an interface Example This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 Console config mac acl permit any any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if mac access group M4 in Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console 4 139 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This example creates an Egress MAC ACL Console config access list mac M5 Console config mac acl deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged 802
454. t used CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS server on this switch and a domain name list has been specified the switch will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match When more than one name server is specified the servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response Note that if all name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled Command Attributes Domain Lookup Status Enables DNS host name to address translation Default Domain Namel 3 Defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names Range 1 64 alphanumeric characters Domain Name List Defines define a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names Range 1 64 alphanumeric characters 1 5 names Name Server List Specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Range 1 6 IP addresses 13 Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name 3 211 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Select DNS General Configuration Set the default domain name or list of domain names specify one or more name servers to use to use for address resolution enable domain lookup status and click Apply
455. tagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config 1f Related Commands switchport mode 4 240 4 241 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport ingress filtering 4 242 This command enables ingress filtering for an interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Example The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config 1f VLAN COMMANDS
456. tatic Table page VLAN CONFIGURATION Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN name and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply VLAN Static Table VLAN 2 y Name R amp D Status Enable Port Tagged Untagged Forbidden None Trunk Member 1 G C 6 2 O a C 3 C 6 G 4 C C C G ee eee A A Figure 3 76 VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members CLI The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 174 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 4 244 Console config if exit Console Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 2 config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged config if exit config interface ethernet 1 13 config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier 3 175 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member Non Member VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Membership by Port Select an
457. tatic or Dynamic Example The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Ports Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static 2 Eth 1 12 Dynamic Console 4 286 IP INTERFACE COMMANDS IP Interface Commands An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your network The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another network segment Basic IP Configuration Table 4 73 IP Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page ip address Sets the IP address for the current IC 4 288 interface ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DCHP client PE 4 289 request ip default gateway Defines the default gateway through GC 4 289 which this switch can reach other subnetworks show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4 291 show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured PE 4 291 for this device ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to NE 4 292 another node on the network PE 4 287 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip address This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VL
458. te nterface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 48 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Consoleftdot1x re authenticate Console dotlx re authentication This command enables periodic re authentication globally for all ports Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax no dot1x re authentication Command Mode Interface Configuration 4 108 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx re authentication Console config if dotlx timeout quiet period This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form to reset the default Syntax dotlx timeout quiet period seconds no dotlx timeout quiet period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 60 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx timeout quiet period 350 Console config 1f dot1x timeout re authperiod This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Syntax dotlx timeout re authperiod seconds no dotlx timeout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 3600 seconds 4 109 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode
459. ted password SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default access level is Normal Exec The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are Table 4 10 Default Login Settings username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user Console config username bob access level 15 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config 4 35 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE enable password 4 36 After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec password Remember to record it in a safe place This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax enable password level ve 0 7 password no enable password level eve e level eve Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14
460. ter Information Table 3 7 LACP Port Counters Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs teceived on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 7 LACP Port Counters Continued Field Description Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Unknown Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Pkts Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Web Click Port LACP Port Counters Information Select a member port to display the corresponding information LACP Port Counters Information Member Port 7 Trunk ID LACPDUs Sent LACPDUs Receive Marker Sent _ Marker Receive Marker Unknown Pkts Marker Illegal Pkts Figure 3 54 LACP Port Counters Information 3 117 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI The following example displays LACP counters for port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 counters Channel group 1 LACP
461. terface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 27 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console configure Console config Related Commands end 4 29 show history 4 28 This command shows the contents of the command history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer Console show history Execution command history 2 config 1 show history Configuration command history 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 interface vlan 1 1 end Console GENERAL COMMANDS The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer config Console 2 Console config Console config reload end This command restarts the system Note When the system is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain
462. tets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231 Broadcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 Console Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses for all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port Setting Static Addresses 3 134 A static address can be
463. that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Domain names ate added to the end of the list one at a time e When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS server on this switch it will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match e If there is no domain list the domain name specified with the ip domain name command is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used 4 167 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example adds two domain names to the current list and then displays the list Console config ip domain list sample com jp Console config ip domain list sample com uk Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain name 4 166 ip name server 4 168 This command specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Use the no form to remove a name server from this list Syntax no ip name server server address1 server address2 server address6 e server address1 IP address of domain name server e server address2 server address6 IP addres
464. the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers 4 15 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config line login local Console config line Related Commands username 4 34 password 4 16 password This command specifies the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password e 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password e password Character string that specifies the line password Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuratio
465. the VLAN interface through which the management station is connected with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as the switch s IP interface to which it is connected If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station and the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network must be configured with the appropriate tag If you cannot connect using Telnet you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time B 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Continued Symptom Action Cannot connect using Secure Shell If you cannot connect using SSH you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured on the switch and that the SSH client software is properly configured on the management station Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch and exported this key to the SSH client Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user including user name authentication level and password Be sure you have imported the client s public key to the switch if public key authentication is used Cannot access
466. the default Syntax switchport mode trunk hybrid no switchport mode trunk Specifies a port as an end point fora VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchport acceptable frame types 4 241 4 240 VLAN COMMANDS switchport acceptable frame types This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable frame types e all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged tagged The port only receives tagged frames Default Setting All frame types Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are un
467. the engine ID engineID Local SNMP The number of times that the engine has re initialized engineBoots since the snmp EngineID was last configured 4 155 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE snmp setver view 4 156 This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB Use the no form to remove an SNMP view Syntax snmp server view view name oid tree included excluded no snmp server view view name view name Name of an SNMP view Range 1 64 characters oid tree Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string Refer to the examples included Defines an included view e excluded Defines an excluded view Default Setting defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Views are used in the snmp server group command to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Examples This view includes MIB 2 Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table ifDescr The wildcard is used to select all the index values in this table Console config snmp server view ifEntry 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 included Console config SNMP COMMANDS This view includes the MIB 2 inter
468. the features listed in this manual The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment Key Features Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Configuration Backup to TFTP server Backup and Restore Authentication Console Telnet Web User name password RADIUS TACACS Web SSL HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP v1 2c Community strings IP address filtering SNMP v3 MD5 or SHA password Port IEEE 802 1X MAC address filtering Access Control Lists Supports up to 32 IP or MAC ACLs DNS Server Supported Port Configuration Speed duplex mode and flow control Rate Limiting Input and output rate limiting per port 1 1 INTRODUCTION Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Port Mirroring One or more ports mirrored to single analysis port Port Trunking Supports up to 32 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking LACP Broadcast Storm Control Supported Address Table Up to 16K MAC addresses in the forwarding table 1024 MAC addresses IEEE 802 1D Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Bridge Store and Forward Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eliminating Switching bad frames Spanning Tree Suppo
469. the flash memory with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the available log memory 256 kilobytes has been exceeded The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 7 to be logged to RAM Command Attributes System Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the logging process Default Enabled Flash Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s permanent flash memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level O to level 3 will be logged to flash Range 0 7 Default 3 Table 3 3 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 Debug Debugging messages 6 Informational Informational messages only 5 Notice Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 Warning Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 33 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 34 Table 3 3 Logging Levels Continued Level Severity Name Description 3 Error Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memoty error resource exhausted 1 Alert Immediate action needed 0 Emergency System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the cu
470. the no form to disable the private VLAN Syntax pvlan up link nzerface list down link nterface lisf no pvlan e up link Specifies an uplink interface e down link Specifies a downlink interface Default Setting No private VLANs are defined 4 247 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A private VLAN provides port based security and isolation between ports within the VLAN Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from the uplink port Private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Entering the pvlan command without any parameters enables the private VLAN Entering no pvlan disables the private VLAN Example This example enables the private VLAN and then sets port 24 as the uplink and ports 5 8 as the downlinks Console config pvlan Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 24 down link ethernet 1 5 8 Console config show pvlan This command displays the configured private VLAN Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 24 Down link port Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 8 Console 4 248 VLAN COMMANDS Configuring Protocol based VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standa
471. the on board configuration program via a serial port connection e Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and the baud rate set to any of the following 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps e Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in the Installation Guide Forgot or lost the password Contact SMC Technical Support for help B 2 USING SYSTEM LOGS Using System Logs If a fault does occur refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch If the problem appears to be caused by the switch follow these steps 1 Enable logging 2 Set the error messages reported to include all categories 3 Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages 4 Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error 5 Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault Also make a list of any error messages displayed 6 Contact your distributor s service engineer For example Console config logging on Console config logging history flash 7 Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 23 B 3 TROUBLESHOOTING B 4 GLOSSARY Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP o
472. the server key size 5 Enable SSH Service On the SSH Settings page enable the SSH server on the switch 6 Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Notes 1 To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys 3 69 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 70 2 The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions
473. the view for write access 1 64 characters Default Setting Default groups Default groups public read only private read write readview Every object belonging to the Internet OID space 1 3 6 1 writeview Nothing is defined Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e A group sets the access policy for the assigned users When authentication is selected the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as specified in the snmp server user command e When privacy is selected the DES 56 bit algorithm is used for data encryption 15 No view is defined 16 Maps to the defaultview 4 158 SNMP COMMANDS Example Console config Hsnmp server group r amp d v3 auth write daily Console config show snmp group Four default groups are provided SNMPv1 read only access and read write access and SNMPv2c read only access and read write access Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 159 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 160 Example Group Name red Security Model Read View Write View Notify View Storage Type Row Status Security Model Read View Write View Notify View Storage Type Row Status Security Model Read View Write View Notify View Storage Type Row Status Security Model Read View Write View Notify View Storage Type Row Status Console show snmp group v3 mib 2 802 1d none nonvolatile active Group Name public vi defaultview none
474. then click Delete SNMPv3 Views Nam OID Subtrees D readacce s View OID Subtrees Ett 6 FP defaultview ID Subtrees Edit OID Subt F writeaccess view OID Subtrees Edit 210 Subtrees SNMPv3 View Edit SNMPv3 Views View View readaccess OID Subtree Type F 1 3 6 1 2 Included View Name Back Current New OID Subtree lt lt Add T Included z Remove yee neu Back Figure 3 29 Configuring SNMPv3 Views 3 57 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Use the snmp server view command to configure a new view This example view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the wildcard mask selects all index entries Console config snmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included 4 156 Console config exit Console show snmp view 4 157 View Name ifEntry a Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name readaccess Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console User Authentication 3 58 You can restrict management access to this switch using the following options e User Accounts Manually configure management access rights on for u
475. tinued Command Function Mode Page spanning tree mst Accesses MSTP configuration mode GC 4 219 configuration mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree MST 4 219 instance mst priority Configures the priority of a spanning MST 4 221 tree instance name Configures the name for the multiple MST 4 222 spanning tree revision Configures the revision number for the MST 4 222 multiple spanning tree max hops Configures the maximum number of MST 4 223 hops allowed in the region before a BPDU is discarded spanning tree Disables spanning tree for an interface IC 4 224 spanning disabled spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost IC 4 225 of an interface spanning tree Configures the spanning tree priority of IC 4 226 port priority an interface spanning tree edge port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC 4 226 spanning tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC 4 227 spanning tree link type Configures the link type for RSTP IC 4 228 MSTP spanning tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance IC 4 229 in the MST spanning tree mst Configures the priority of an instance IC 4 231 port priority in the MST spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU PE 4 232 protocol migration format 4 211 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 55 Spanning Tree Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page show
476. tiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host Use the no form with the multi host max count keywords to restore the default maximum count Syntax dotlx operation mode single host multi host max count count no dotlx operation mode multi host max count e single host Allows only a single host to connect to this port e multi host Allows multiple host to connect to this port max count Keyword for the maximum number of hosts count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port Range 1 1024 Default 5 Default Single host Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage The max count parameter specified by this command is only effective if the dot1x mode is set to auto by the dot1x port control command page 4 105 4 107 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e In multi host mode only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access Similarly a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx operation mode multi host max count 10 Console config if dotlx re authenticate This command forces re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dotlx re authentica
477. tity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section Command Attributes Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port e Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1 X authorized port Options Single Host Multi Host Default Single Host e Max Count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi Host operation mode is selected Range 1 1024 Default 5 e Mode Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options Auto Requires a dotlx aware client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dotlx aware or otherwise This is the default setting Force Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dotlx awate or otherwise e Re authentication Sets the client to be re authenticated after the interval specified by the Re authentication Period Re authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port Default Disabled 3 80 USER AUTHENTICATION Max Request Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 Quiet Period Se
478. tmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match Default Setting None 13 Includes TCP UDP or other protocol types 4 120 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Command Mode Extended ACL Command Usage All new rules are appended to the end of the list Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule However if DSCP is used then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified The control code bitmask is a decimal number representing an equivalent bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control
479. to quit a CLI session Console quit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username System Management Commands These commands are used to control system logs passwords user names browser configuration options and display or configure a variety of other system information Table 4 7 System Management Commands Command Group Function Page Device Designation Configures information that uniquely identifies this 4 32 switch User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for 4 34 management access IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed 4 37 management access Web Server Enables management access via a web browser 4 39 Telnet Server Enables management access via Telnet 4 43 Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4 44 Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4 56 SMTP Alerts Configures SMTP email alerts 4 65 Time System Clock Sets the system clock automatically via NIP SNTP 4 70 server or manually 4 31 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 7 System Management Commands Continued Command Group Function Page System Status Displays system configuration active managers and 4 76 version information Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames 4 82 Device Designation Commands Table 4 8 Device Designation Commands Command Function Mode Page prompt Cu
480. ton to restart the switch When prompted confirm that you want to reset the switch Reset the switch by selecting Reset Reset Figure 3 20 Resetting the System CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch Console reload 4 29 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt Note When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test 3 41 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Setting the System Clock 3 42 Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries You can also manually set the clock using the CLI See calendar set on page 4 74 If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup When the SNTP client is enabled the switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Configuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to specific time servers Command Attributes e SNTP Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client This mode requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field
481. top Bits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Range 1 2 Default 1 stop bit Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local 1 CLI only 3 29 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click System Line Console Specify the console port connection parameters as required then click Apply _ _ _ _ __ __ ___ ___ _______________________ _ _ Console Login Timeout 0 300 0 secs 0 Disabled Exec Timeout 0 65535 0 secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 3 0 Disabled Silent Time 0 65535 i 0 ike 0 Disabled baas es ooo Parity None y Speed Auto y Stop Bits hz Figure 3 13 Configuring the Console Port CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for the console then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current console port settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line console 4 14 Console config line tlogin local 4 15 Console co
482. tored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes 3 126 PORT CONFIGURATION Command Attribute Rate Limit Sets the output rate limit for an interface Default Status Disabled Default Rate 1000 Mbps Range 1 1000 Mbps Web Click Rate Limit Input Output Port Trunk Configuration Set the Input Rate Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status then set the rate limit for the individual interfaces and click Apply Output Rate Limit Port Configuration Port Output Rate Limit Status Output Rate Limit Mbps Trunk V Enabled 1000 I Enabled F Enabled I Enabled I Enabled I Enabled I Enabled I Enabled ol alrniolalelwin gt F Enabled 2 zj Figure 3 59 Rate Limit Configuration CLI This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through port 1 to 600 Mbps Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 174 Console config if rate limit input 600 4 191 Console config if rate limit output 600 Console config if Showing Port Statistics You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet like MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch su
483. treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree Example Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 2 5 Console config mstp SPANNING TREE COMMANDS mst priority This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance Use the no form to restore the default Syntax mst ustance_id priority priority no mst nstance_ d priority instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e priority Priority of the a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance The device with the highest priority 1 e lowest numerical value becomes the MSTI root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of 0 or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384 Example Console config mstp mst 1 priority 4096 Console config mstp 4 221 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE name This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which this switch is located U
484. tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config if Related Commands spanning tree portfast 4 227 spanning tree portfast This command sets an interface to fast forwarding Use the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax no spanning tree portfast Default Setting Disabled 4 227 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed straight to Forwarding e Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device This command is the same as
485. ts the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 Re authentication Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 Tx Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 seconds Default 30 Authorized Yes Connected client is authorized No Connected client is not authorized Blank Displays nothing when dotlx is disabled on a port Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click Security 802 1X Port Configuration Modify the parameters required and click Apply 802 1X Port Configuration Port Status Operation Max Count Mode Ro hace QuieV authony Tx Period Authorized Supplicant Trunk Mode 1 20 authen Red Perio Porsi pp 1 Disabled Single Host z Force Authotized i Enable 2 E 3600 30 fe ar F 00 00 00 2 Disabled Singie Host ForceAuthorized Enable 2 60 3600 po 000000 aS a gt 7 an 0 3 Disabled Single Host Force Au orized 2 I Enable 2 o 3600 o ken 00 00 00 4 Disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized I Enable f2 60 3600 fo Pro gt 5 Disabled Si
486. tting Syntax ip ssh authentication retries count no ip ssh authentication retries count The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset Range 1 5 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip ssh authentication retires 2 Console config Related Commands show ip ssh 4 54 ip ssh server key size 4 50 This command sets the SSH server key size Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh server key size ke size no ip ssh server key size key size The size of server key Range 512 896 bits Default Setting 768 bits Command Mode Global Configuration SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch e The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Example Console config ip ssh server key size 512 Console config delete public key This command deletes the specified user s public key Syntax delete public key username dsa rsa username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters e dsa DSA public key type e rsa RSA public key type Default Setting Deletes both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console delete public key admin dsa Console ip ssh crypto host key generate This command generates the host ke
487. ttings You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or shared media connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Command Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 149 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets 3 153 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured e Spanning Tree Enables disables STA on this interface Default Enabled e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning
488. ty Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23 The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to process messages such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database Range 16 23 Default 23 Logging Trap Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server Range 0 7 Default 7 Host IP List Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that will receive syslog messages The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five 3 35 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Host IP Address Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List Web Click System Log Remote Logs To add an IP address to the Host IP List type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Host IP List and then click Remove Remote Logs Remote Log Status F Enabled Logging Facility 16 23 23 Logging Trap 0 7 7 Host IP Address Current New Host I
489. unit Keyword that allows you to copy to from a specific unit in the stack Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 6699 6699 cc 9D io A ae Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files The maximum number of user defined configuration files depends on available memory You can use Factory_Default_Config cfg as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware or contact your distributor for help For information on specifying an https certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 66 For information on configuring the switch to use HTTPS SSL for a secure connection see ip http server on page 4 40 4 85 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 86 Example The following example shows ho
490. urce port Console ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS This is a more comprehensive example It denies any TCP packets in which the SYN bit is ON and permits all other packets It then sets the ingress mask to check the deny rule first and finally binds port 1 to this ACL Note that once the ACL is bound to an interface 1 e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Switch config taccess list ip extended 6 Switch config ext acl permit any any Switch config ext acl deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Switch config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Console configure Switch config access list ip mask precedence in Switch config ip mask acl mask protocol any any control flag 2 Switch config ip mask acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console configure Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A6 in Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console show access list ip mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs Syntax
491. ut Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3 126 Trunk Configuration Output Sets the output rate limit for each port 3 126 Port Configuration Output Sets the output rate limit for each trunk 3 126 Trunk Configuration Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3 127 Address Table 3 134 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or 3 134 VLAN Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the 3 136 Address Table Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3 137 Spanning Tree 3 138 STA Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3 140 Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA 3 144 RSTP and MSTP Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3 149 Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3 149 Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3 153 NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for 3 153 STA MSTP VLAN Configuration Configures priority and VLANs for a 3 156 spanning tree instance Port Information Displays port settings for a specified MST 3 160 instance Trunk Information Displays trunk settings for a specified MST 3 160 instance Port Configuration Configures port settings for a specified 3 162 MST instance Trunk Configuration C
492. valid use control code 2 control bitmask 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 control bitmask 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 control bitmask 18 3 91 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as service type protocol type or TCP control code Then click Add Extended ACL Name mike Control Destination Source Destination Source IP Source Destination gt Source Destination Control Code Action Address Subnet Mask IP Address Subnet TOS Precedence DSCP Protocol poe Port Bit po Pon Bit Code pit Remove Mask Mask Mask Perrit 10710 25527552550 Any Any Any Ary Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Remove Permit 192 168 1 0 2 255 0 Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any BO BSE Any Any Remove Action Permit y P 192168 1 0 255 255 2550 Ary Y Serace Type TOS 016 Precedence 08 OSCP 064 Protocol TCPG CUP I7 C Others Source Port 065535 le Source Port Bt Mask 0 65536 Destination Port 65535 Destination Pon Ba Mask 0 65535 Control Code 263 Control Code Bit Mask 0 63 ma Figure 3 43 ACL Configuration Extended IP CLI This example adds thr
493. ve bytes Command Attributes Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to match any address Host to ACCESS CONTROL LISTS specify a host address not a subnet or IP to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host IP Default Any Source Destination Subnet Mask Source or destination address of rule must match this bitmask See the description for SubMask on page 3 89 e Protocol Mask Check the protocol field Service Type Mask Check the rule for the specified priority type Options Precedence TOS DSCP Default TOS Source Destination Port Bit Mask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 e Control Code Bit Mask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 Web Configure the mask to match the required rules in the IP ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a specific host address or an address range Include other criteria to search for in the rules such as a protocol type or one of the service types Or use a bitmask to search for specific protocol port s or TCP control code s Then click Add ACL Mask IP Configuration Mask IP Ingress Table Source Subnet Destination Protocol TOS Precedence DSCP Source Port Destination Port Control Code Remove M Subnet Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask Bit Mask Bit Mask Bit Mask 255 255
494. vel 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number Information Unit 1 Port 43 link down notification Log Messages Level 6 Module functions 1 error number Information Unit 1 Port 43 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number Information Unit 1 Port 43 link down notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number Information Unit 1 Port 43 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module5 functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 Port 43 link down notification Log Messages Level 6 Module5 functions 1 error number Information Unit 1 Port 43 link up notification Log Messages Level Module 5 functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 Port 43 link down notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number Information Unit 1 Port 43 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Modules functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 Port 43 link down notification z Figure 3 17 Displaying Logs CLI This example shows the event messages stored in RAM Console show logging ram 4 62 flash Event history stored in flash memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM Console show log ram 1 23 20 13 2001 01 01 STA topology change notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 23 19 41 2001 01 01 STA topology change notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Console
495. ver key green Console config show tacacs server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show tacacs server Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 10 11 12 13 Communication key with TACACS server Server port number 49 Console Port Security Commands These commands can be used to enable port security on a port When using port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message 4 101 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 31 Port Security Commands Command Function Mode Page port security Configures a secure port IC 4 102 mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a GC 4 206 VLAN show mac address table Displays entries in the PE 4 208 bridge forwarding database port security Th
496. ver location WC 9 Console config snmp server contact Bill I2C Bus Initialization Switch Int Loopback Test Crossbar Int Loopback Test 4 33 4 150 4 150 SMC8748M SMC8724M 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 42 0 days 19 hours 6 minutes and 1 43 R amp D 5 WC 9 Bill 00 30 F1 DF 9C AO enabled 80 enabled 443 enable 23 Enabled Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Use the Switch Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management software as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch Number of Ports Number of built in ports Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board 3 14 BASIC CONFIGURATION Internal Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply Management Software EPLD Version Version number of EEPROM Programmable Logic Device Loader Version Version number of loader code Boot ROM Version Version of Power On Self Test POST and boot code Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code e Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master or Slave These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI Unit ID Unit number in stack e Redundant Power Status Displays the status of the redundant power supply Web Click System Switch Information Switch Informatio
497. viDa 20r1Iz6UK 6VFOgvUDFed1lnixYTVo h5v8r0ea2r pnO6DkZAAAAFQCNZn x17dwpW8Rrv DOnSWw4Qk 6QAAATEAptkGeB6B5hwagH4g UOCY6i1TmrmSiJgfwO090qRPUMPCAKCC uzxatO0o7drnl ZypMx Sx5RUdMGgKS 9ywsa 1cWqHeFY5i1c31DCNBueeLykZzVS RS azTKIK zrJh8GLG Nq375R55yRxFvmcGin Q7IphPqyJ309MK8LFD mJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP20FQGX7VGOEbzVDSOI RTMFy 3iUXtvGyQAOVSy6 7Mf c3 1MtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NxgilCg5z7VqbmRm2 8mWc5a f8TUAg PNWKV6 WOhqmshQdotVzDR1e XKNTZj OuTwWfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrbl DMdAfjnte8MZZs Console Configuring the SSH Server The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication Field Attributes SSH Server Status Allows you to enable disable the SSH server on the switch Default Disabled e Version The Secure Shell version number Version 2 0 is displayed but the switch supports management access v a either SSH Version 1 5 or 2 0 clients SSH Authentication Timeout Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt Range 1 to 120 seconds Default 120 USER AUTHENTICATION SSH Authentication Retries Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process Range 1 5 times Default 3 SSH Server Key Size Specifies the SSH server key size Range 512 896 bits Default 768 The server key is a private key that is never shared out
498. via DHCP by default Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network administrator IP address for the switch e Default gateway for the network e Network mask for this network To assign an IP address to the switch complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address p address netmask where ip address is the switch IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt BASIC CONFIGURATION 3 Type exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt 4 To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 Console config Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received You therefore need to use the ip dhcp restart command to start broadcasting service requests Requests will be sen
499. via Telnet is enabled Telnet server port Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface e Jumbo Frame Shows if jumbo frames are enabled POST result Shows results of the power on self test BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System System Information Specify the system name location and contact information for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet SMC8748M SMC8724M Manager System Name feos Object 1D 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 42 Location Wes Contact Bill System Up Timel0 days 18 hours 52 minutes and 26 37 seconds Connect to textual user interface Ela Send mail to technical support Contact tact Connect to SMC Web Site Figure 3 3 System Information 3 13 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config exit Console show system System description System OID string System information System Up time seconds System Name System Location System Contact MAC address unitl Web server Web server port Web secure server Web secure server port Telnet server Telnet server port Jumbo Frame POST result DUMMY Test 1 UART Loopback Test DRAM Test Timer Test PCI Device 1 Test Fan Speed Test Done All Pass Console Console config hostname R amp D 5 Console config snmp ser
500. w to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server Consolettcopy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup 01 TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console copy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console The following example shows how to download a configuration file Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Source configuration file name startup 01 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a secure site certificate from an TFTP server It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate Console copy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Source certificate file name SS certificate Source private file name SS private Private password x x x x Success Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y FLasH FiLE COMMANDS This example shows how to copy a public key used by SSH from an TFTP server Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch
501. whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Out of Band Management Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1X Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Glossary 5 GLOSSARY Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides
502. x default Console config 4 105 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dotix dotix 4 106 max req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dotlx max teq count no dotlx max req count The maximum number of requests Range 1 10 Default 2 Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx max req 2 Console config if port control This command sets the dotlx mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dotix port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dot1x port control e auto Requires a dotlx aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients eitherdot1x aware or otherwise e force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx port control auto Console config 1f dotlx operation mode This command allows single or mul
503. xample assigns a CoS value of zero to packets matching rules within the specified ACL on port 24 Console config interface ethernet 1 24 4 174 Console config if map access list ip bill cos 0 4 129 Console config if 3 200 MULTICAST FILTERING Multicast Filtering Multicasting is used to support real time Unicast applications such as videoconferencing pe FOW or streaming audio A multicast server 4 does not have to establish a separate C O connection with each client It merely JA l broadcasts its service to the network and gt C N CN any hosts that want to receive the ER oY w Y multicast register with their local multicast switch router Although this CN ar casi approach reduces the network overhead required by a multicast server the es broadcast traffic must be carefully A pruned at every multicast switch router it _ E l Ce a Or passes through to ensure that traffic is UL UL Le C P only passed on to the hosts which subscribed to this service This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service This procedure is called multicast filtering
504. y monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the 3 136 destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Attributes Interface Indicates a port or trunk MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address VLAN or interface port or trunk Dynamic Address Counts The number of addresses dynamically learned Current Dynamic Address Table Lists all the dynamic addresses ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type ie mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by F Interface E Port fi gt Trunk z I MAC Address 5 T VLAN fix Address Table Sort Key Address Query Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 VLAN 2 Unit 1 Port 1 Dynamic Current Dynamic Address Table Figure 3 63 Dynamic Addresses CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 1 Console show mac address table interface ethernet 1 1 4 208 Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34
505. y be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 177 3 173 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 174 Command Attributes VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 no leading zeroes Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Port Port identifier Trunk Trunk identifier Membership Type Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP For more information see Automatic VLAN Registration on page 3 166 None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To adda trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN S
506. y pair 1 e public and private Syntax ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa rsa e dsa DSA Version 2 key type e rsa RSA Version 1 key type Default Setting Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs 4 51 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command stores the host key pair in memory i e RAM Use the ip ssh save host key command to save the host key pair to flash memory e Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process Otherwise you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it e The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto zeroize 4 52 ip ssh save host key 4 53 ip ssh crypto zeroize This command clears the host key from memory i e RAM Syntax ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type Default Setting Clears both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 52 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage This command clears the host key from volatile memory RAM Use the no ip ssh save host key command to clear the host key from flash memory The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this
507. you must copy the running configuration to the start up configuration file using the copy command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Enter the name of the start up file Press lt Enter gt Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 2 15 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Managing System Files 2 16 The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program Web interface or SNMP The switch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are e Configuration This file stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup A file named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 3 25 for more information e Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code
508. ype This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets Range 600 fff hex A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Ethernet Type Bit Mask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex 3 93 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 94 e Packet Format This attribute includes the following packet types Any Any Ethernet packet type Untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets Untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Command Usage Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or MAC If you select Host enter a specific address e g 11 22 33 44 55 66 If you select MAC enter a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as VID Ethernet type or packet format Then click Add MAC ACL El Name bob VID Bit Ethernet Ethernet Type Packet Action Source MAC Source Bit Destination MAC Destination Bit vio Address Mask jask Type Bit Mask Format Address Mask Permit Any Any 00 0 29 94 34 de EEN
509. ystem This command specifies the image used to start up the system Syntax boot system unit boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code filename Name of the configuration file or image name unif Stack unit Range 1 8 The colon is required Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A colon is required after the specified file type e If the file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file 4 90 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Example Console config boot system config startup Console config Related Commands dir 4 88 whichboot 4 89 Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods You can also enable port based authentication for network client access using TEEE 802 1X Table 4 27 Authentication Commands Command Group Function Page Authentication Defines logon authentication method and 4 91 Sequence precedence RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a 4 94 RADIUS server TACACS Client Configures settings for authentication via a 4 98 TACACS server Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port 4 101 Port Authentication Configures host

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  ICON Enterprises SB-100 User's Manual  Trust Chat & VoIP Pack CP-2100  Mai 2014  Manuel d`installation et d`entretien Séries EX12*-SMB1-XP  INSTALLATION MANUAL MANUEL D`INSTALLATION  IRSC02180 関税同盟技術規則  Kabayaki 取扱説明書  DataMate™ V.34 Modem  P74725A_F5D7632it4_man  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file